Home

Minolta C350 Color Printer/Scanner/Copier

1. Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner 7 gt Staple 12 Tum ji 9 10 p gate 7 Shit Coi Corner oo Staple 78 7 gt 12 Turn 9 10 3 4 me 1112 Hole gt 56 Punch 01 Tum g 9 10 2 Staples Original Direction EE 1112 Crosswise a Hole a 8 Punch 78 2 Staples o 07 gt 12 Tum 9 10 ti 34 page 1112 Corner Staple Tas eTo 1 3 4 the 11 12 page 5 6 Corner 7 8 Staple 1 2 gt 9 1 J 3 4 eml 12 a page Hole Punch Original Direction 1 2 el gt 3 9 10 2 Staples Lengthwise 23 4 the 11 12 page 5 6 Hole 7 8 Punch Fal 9 9 2 Staples 3 4 ppm n 12 page 14 18 C350 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 14 Top Bound Double Sided Documents Top Bound Double Sided Document Single Sided Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Scr
2. Single Sided Document Double 2in1 Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner Staple T gt 1 2 Turn 3 4 5 6 the page Corner Staple T gt 12 um page Hole l gt 34 Punch i 2 Staples Original Direction p1 2 am 56 p Crosswise page PET Hole Punch T 2 Staples 1 2 frum 5 6 ti page Corner 7 gt Staple 1 Turn i 5 2 puga 6 Aan Corner 3 Staple NE 1 tum 5 ti 2 aL Hole Punch Original Direction 6 1 Tum 5 2 Staples Lengthwise FQ ire 6 PET S Hole 3 Punch ri 4 2 Staples Turn 5 2 e 6 C350 14 11 Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications Single Sided Document Double 4in1 Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner 7 Y Staple ia 5 619 19 p the 78 34 page 11 12 mT
3. COPIER Being S Delete Copy 1 Set Jobs Specifying the desired copy settings then pressing the Start key queues the copy operation in this machine This queued operation is called a job Scan and computer print operations are also listed as jobs e The queued jobs are listed in the job display The jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the list e Jobs are numbered in the order that they are programmed and queued for printing The job number identifies the job it does not indicate the printing order In addition the job number does not change until the job is deleted Multi Job Feature While one job is being printed another job can be queued As many as 49 jobs can be queued e When one job is finished being printed the next queued job automatically begins However from the Increase Priority screen a specific job can be moved to the front of the queue so that it is printed next 8 2 C350 8 1 Overview of Jobs 8 Changing the Copy Settings for a Queued Job The copy settings for jobs listed as Waiting Print can be changed Change the copy settings according to the procedure described below 1 4 5 Touch Job Log The list of queued jobs is display
4. 3 2 C350 3 1 Specifying the Number of Copies To change the setting for the number of copies 1 Press the C clear key The specified number of copies is cleared and the setting for the number of copies shown in the touch panel is reset to 1 Ready to copy Drig Copy PBe ity Application 2 Using the keypad specify the desired number of copies The specified number of copies appears in the touch panel C350 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 2 Stopping Copying 3 2 Stopping Copying The following procedure describes how to stop printing a copy job 1 Press the Stop key while a job is being printed Printing stops A screen for deleting jobs appears Job has been stopped To resume job press the Start K Select jobs to delete User Status Dest Orig Copy 328 2 285 2 COPIER BE9RPE4 Elev 1 17 09 41 09 42 If a document is being scanned for a job scanning stops when the Stop key is pressed A Hint To continue the stopped job press the Start key All stopped jobs continue 2 To delete a stopped jo
5. 7 28 C350 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters 7 To adjust the Saturation parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the vividness of the colors in the image 1 Touch Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Saturation 3 Touch i and p to select the desired setting and then touch Enter o To cancel the Saturation function touch Cancel in the Saturation screen R Additional Information Ready to copy Pr P scan 00 AA lumber in color Balance Saturation A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39 C350 7 29 N o a ok x E 0 Application Functions Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters To adjust the Sharpness parameter This parameter emphasizes the edges of text so that they can be read more easily In addition this parameter can be used to make an overly sharp image softer or a blurry image clearer 1 Touch Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment 2 Inthe Color Image Adjus
6. Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner gt Staple 1 2 puro 3 4 pada T gt 1 2 rum 34 the page Hole gt Punch 1 2 Turn 3 4 2 Staples Original Direction l tha a Crosswise pan Hole Punch 2 Staples o 0 gt 1 2 Turn 3 4 the page Corner 7 gt Staple 1 Turn 3 Cae 4 7 gt 1 jum 3 ti y 2 page 4 Hole 1 gt Y 3 Punch Original Direction 7 ie 3 2 Staples Lengthwise page Hole Punch 2 Staples 6 gt 1 Tan 3 2 pada 4 14 8 C350 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 14 Single Sided Document Single 4in1 Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner 7 gt Staple 1 2 Turn 56 P 34 e 78 7 gt 12 Tum 5 6 th 34 page 78 Hole gt Punch 21 2 Tum S6 2 Staples lo e Original Direction 13 4 page NN Crosswise 7 Hole Punch 2 Staples gt gt 12 qun 56 ti 34 page 78 Corner 1 2 gt 5 6 Staple 3 4 pum 7 8 page 1 2 5 6 3
7. Delete Display in Enlarge Display Mode If the toner is about to run out appears in the screen on the touch panel Ready to copy _7BeRS Mixed e Original Touch _ to display the message shown in the following illustration 11 2 C350 11 1 When the Message Toner Cartridge X needs to be replaced soon Appears 1 1 Toner CartridgetY needs to be replaced soon ba Additional Information About 1000 Letter pages can be printed after the message Toner Cartridge X needs to be replaced soon appears When the message appears prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement When the message Replace the Toner cartridge appears the machine stops operating C350 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 2 When the Message Replace the Toner cartridge Appears 11 2 When the Message Replace the Toner cartridge Appears When the toner is empty a warning message appears and copies can no longer be made As an example the message indicating that the yellow toner is empty when replaceable by the user is shown below Replace the Toner cartridge Open the front door and follow the instructions Display in Enl
8. 4 Touch the key for the desired setting User s Choice 1 Enable Disable Key Click Sound 5 Touch Enter Enter 6 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again 10 10 C950 10 4 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 1 Functions 1 0 Setting the Power Save Function This function is used to specify the length of time after the last operation until this machine automatically enters Power Save mode and whether or not the machine enters Power Save mode when a job is stored in the memory or a locked job is programmed The default setting is 15 min and Permit N Reference For more details refer to Turning the Machine On and Off on page 2 17 N Additional Information Jobs stored in the memory and locked jobs are erased when the machine enters Power Save mode or Sleep mode 1 Press the Utility key Touch User s Choice 1 Touch 2 2 User s Choice 1 k OO N Touch Power Save Account Change Auto Reset 5 Press the C clear key The currently specified value is erased C350 10 11 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations
9. Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner 7 gt Staple 1 e213 page gt Corner Staple 7 gt 1 Turn the page Hole i gt Y Punch Original Direction N 1 Tam 2 3 2 Staples Crosswise pagel Hole Punch 2 Staples gt gt 1 Turn the page Corner gt Staple 1 Turn 3 the page Corner 2 Staple gt 1 Turn 3 the page Hole Punch Original Direction 1 gt p 3 2 Staples Lengthwise i ee page Hole 2 Punch E gt 2 Staples Turn 3 the page 14 22 C350 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 1 4 Chapter 14 Appendix Top Bound Double Sided Document Double 2in1 Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner Staple T gt 1 2 rum 34 56 the page Corner Staple T gt 1 2 Turn 5 the page Hole i gt 34 Punch 2 Staples Original Direction yl 2 am 56 p Crosswise page FED Hole Punch gt 2 Staples 1 2 lum 5 6 d the page Corner
10. user Job Name Status End Delete 11 62 C350 11 7 When the Inspection Mark os Appears 1 1 Display in Enlarge Display Mode If an error occurs during image stabilizing printing or scanning 1 appears in the screen on the touch panel Ready to copy Ori Cop Phot Select Paper Size Mixed Original Touch 1 The mark A appears in the lower left corner of the screen x Touching the inspection mark that appears in the Basic screen displays a screen like that shown below Machine Status Touching Exit in the top right corner displays the Basic screen again C350 11 63 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 8 When the Message Malfunction detected Appears 11 8 When the Message Malfunction detected Appears When the message shown below appears in the touch panel a malfunction has occurred within this machine User JOb Name Status End Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative and provide code C 0200 TEL Delete Display in Enlarge Display Mode If a malfunction occurs the screen shown below appears Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative and provide code C 0200 TEL 11 64 C350 11 8 When the Message Malfunction detected Appea
11. C350 10 63 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings 7 Touch the key for the desired setting O Admin Set A Additional Information If Yes is selected register the prefix suffix that will be added For details on registering prefixes suffixes refer to Setting the Prefix Suffix Registration Function on page 10 65 8 Touch Enter 9 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 10 64 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 1 0 Setting the Prefix Suffix Registration Function This function is used to register prefixes suffixes that can be added when the Add Prefix Suffix function is set to Yes Up to 8 prefixes suffixes can be registered 1 2 7 8 Press the Utility key Touch Admin Mode Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter Touch Admin Set Touch 4 4 Touch Prefix Suffix Registration Admin Set oro sure Registration Touch F and P to select the desired TO Adnin Seb i iu program number Select the desired number using the 4 Key and enter the Prefix Suffix Prefix Suffix Registration Touch P
12. 4 Touch Frame Center Erase The Frame Center Erase screen appears N Hint If necessary specify a Frame Center Erase setting As the factory default no setting is selected C350 3 29 o D o al Basic Copy Operations Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 7 Selecting Original Settings 5 6 Touch A below the desired Frame Center Erase setting Ready to copy Frame cen tel Y Erase If the settings for frame erasing or center amp frame erasing are selected touch J J to specify the width of the area at the book edges to be erased The width of the area erased with the center erasing setting cannot be changed by touching LE S Reminder After selecting a Frame Center Erase setting be sure to touch Original Size on the Frame Center Erase screen and specify the size of the original document If the document size is incorrectly set the correct area of the copy will not be erased Touch Original Size The Original Size screen appears Select the document size and then touch Enter PROTO de size Q Enter J Hint F The Original Size hoto Size setting should be Si the size of the book spread 3 30 C350 3 7 Selecting Original Settings 3 9 Ifthe desired document size is not listed touch Other Sizes to display ff a screen containing additiona
13. To correct color Shift e Correction Value can RESO adjusted by using the r color Shift Correct Press PUANI 10 70 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 10 7 Fold the paper in half while aligning the corners of the printed test pattern 8 If horizontal lines A and B are angled as shown at the right touch to specify the desired gative adjustment for 6 between 1 dot and 10 dots C350 10 71 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 9 If horizontal lines A and B are angled as shown at the right touch to specify the desired positive adjustment for 6 between 1 dot and 10 dots 10 Press the Start key The adjusted test pattern is printed on 11 x 17 size paper 11 Check the print result O If horizontal lines A and B are aligned continue with step 12 O If more adjustment is necessary return to step 8 and repeat the adjustment procedure 12 Touch Enter The Expert User Mode screen appears again 13 Touch Exit in the next three screen that appear The Basic Screen appears again 10 72 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 10 Setting the Color Shift Corr
14. 14 20 C350 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 14 Ed Top Bound Double Sided Document Single 4in1 Copy page Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner 7 gt Staple 1 2 Tum 56 j 34 e 78 gt 12 Tum 5 6 th 34 page 78 Hole gt Punch P1 2 tum ne 2 Staples a j Rg 4 te 78 Original Direction page Crosswise 7 Hole Punch 2 Staples gt gt 12 Turn 56 h 34 page 78 Corner 1 2 gt 5 6 Staple 3 4 pum 7 8 page 25 5 7 3 4 lo 17 8 fa SU page Hole gt Punch Original Direction e1 2 a 5 6 2 Staples Lengthwise 13 4 line 18 page 7 Hole Punch 7 5 gt 5 6 2 Staples 3 4 lm 17 8 C350 14 21 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications Top Bound Double Sided Document Double Sided Copy
15. Single Double paper feed 500 sheets cabinets 1 000 sheets Large capacity paper feed 2 500 sheets cabinet Paper Type Overhead Postcards Envelopes Label Sheets Projector Transparen Paper Source Etc cies Multiple bypass tray 20 sheets 20 sheets 10 sheets 20 sheets 1st drawer 20 sheets 20 sheets 20 sheets 20 sheets 2nd drawer Single Double paper feed cabinets Large capacity paper feed cabinet The single and double paper feed cabinets and the large capacity paper feed cabinet are optional 4 4 C350 4 1 Paper Specifications 4 R Reminder The following types of paper should not be used otherwise decreased print guality paper misfeeds or damage to the machine may occur Overhead projector transparencies that have already been fed through the machine even if the transparency is still blank Paper that has been printed on by a heat transfer printer or an inkjet printer Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin Folded curled wrinkled or torn paper Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time Damp paper Perforated paper or paper with punched holes Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper or paper with an uneven surface Paper that has been treated such as carbon backed heat sensitive or pressure sensitive paper Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing Paper of various s
16. 2 Turn the dial to the left in order to position the stapler at the center 11 50 C350 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears 1 1 3 Pull the staple cartridge holder out toward you Staple cartridge pholder V N 4 Push the staple holder guide up and then pull out one sheet of staples 5 Return the guide to its original position 6 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place 7 Slide the finisher back against the machine C350 11 51 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 11 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears A Reminder If stapling still cannot be performed even after performing the above procedure contact your service representative 11 52 C350 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears 1 1 Clearing Jammed Staples in Finisher FS 601 N Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 R Reminder Ifthe message Staple mode cannot be used appears be sure to perform the following procedure If the following procedure is not followed and the paper is pulled out with too much force the stapler unit may be damaged 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine
17. 6 Touch Panel Reset Timer i Prefix Suffix Registration 7 Press the C clear key The currently specified value is erased and No is selected C350 10 61 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 8 Administrator Settings 8 Using the keypad type in the desired length of time between 1 and 9 minutes O If No is touched the machine will not automatically reset its modes and functions 9 Touch Enter O Admin Set Use numerical Key Pad to set time for panel to automatically reset 10 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 10 62 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 Setting the Add Prefix Suffix Function This function is used to specify whether or not a prefix suffix is added when recalling or entering an address in Scan mode or Box mode The default setting is No N Reference For details on mailbox function expansion refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code Oo Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 4 4 6 Touch Add Prefix Suffix Admin Set 5
18. Se SS gt 2 Open the horizontal transport unit cover 3 Remove any misfed paper and then close the cover of the horizontal transport unit C350 11 53 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears 4 Open the feed guide for the finisher and then remove any misfed paper 5 Open the front door of the finisher 6 Turn misfeed clearing dial O clockwise until the removal indicator is completely blue S Hint If the dial is turned too far turn it counterclockwise to adjust it Removal indicator 11 54 C350 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears 11 N Reminder Ifthe message Staple mode cannot be used appears be sure to perform these steps Ifthe paper is pulled out with too much force without performing these steps the finisher may be damaged 7 Remove all paper fed into the paper output tray 8 Open the transport guide and then pull out any misfed paper in the transport section N Reminder If the paper cannot easily be pulled out stop trying to pull it out and continue with to step 9 Pulling out the paper with too much force may damage the folding unit C350 11 55 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Tou
19. 14 1 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables 14 Invoice 11x17 X 2 000 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 139 7 mm X 215 9 mm 11x 14 X 1 647 Legal X 1 545 Foolscap X 1 529 Letter X 1 294 Zoom ratio Paper size Document size 1 inch 25 4 mm 1 mm 0 0394 inch C350 14 5 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications The most appropriate document feed method and copy settings for specific applications are described below For details on specifying the various copy settings refer to Basic Copy Operations on page 3 1 Description of the Table CLE V 4 gel 2 Staple page 1 2 3 4 5 6 Single Sided Document Single Sided Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen 3 Corner 6 Shows the finished copy Shows how the document should be positioned page 2 44 Shows the selected Output setting Corner Staple 2 Staples or Hole Punch page 3 8 Shows the selected Margin setting from the Orig Copy screen if a margin is specified for the document page 3 40 Shows the selected File Margin setting from the Application screen if a binding margin is specified fo
20. C350 10 95 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 15 Touch Enter The access code permissions and printing limits are applied for the selected ac count 16 Touch Enter The Volume Track Setting screen appears again S Additional Information To apply the selected settings for the selected account to all accounts touch Same for All Volumes in the Allowance screen or Upper Limit Copy Print screen After touching Same for All Volumes requesting confirmation to change the settings screen appears In the screen that appeared touch Yes and then touch Enter to apply the settings for the selected account to all accounts 10 96 C350 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 1 0 Viewing Volume Track Data E K C Counters Volume Track Data E K C Function This function is used to check the following data for each account All Counters e Total Counts the total number of copies and printouts made using all Color settings the Full Color setting the Single Color setting the 2 Color setting and the Black setting e Upper Limit Shows the limits for the number of copies and printouts that can be made using all Color settings the color settings Full Color Single Color and 2 Color and the Black setting e Large Size Counts the total
21. C350 3 35 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings Bound Booklet Bind and Center Erase Settings 3 Select these setting to bind copies with staples and fold them along 4 the center The copies will be made into a booklet If the number of pages in the document cannot be evenly divided mis by 4 the necessary number of blank pages are automatically added to the booklet Example For 8 single sided document pages Example For 6 single sided document pages N Additional Information The printed pages are first fed into the copy output tray and then if the Bind setting was selected the pages are bound together If the pages are removed from the tray that they were first fed into booklet binding cannot be performed Do not remove the pages from a tray until they are fed into the lower paper output tray If less than 4 document pages are loaded they will be fed out without being bound even if the Bind setting was selected 3 36 C350 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings 3 R Hint The copy zoom ratio during 2in1 copying 4in1 copying and booklet binding can be specified using the 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom function on the User s Choice 2 screen For details refer to Setting the 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom Function on page 10 17 Conditions for Making Booklets 46 D Number of copies 10 6 to 10 bound pages
22. Reminder Do not place objects weighing more than 4 1 2 Ib on the original glass In addition do not press down extremely hard on a document placed on the original glass otherwise the original glass may be damaged For thick books or large objects make the copy without closing the original cover or reverse automatic document feeder When a document is being scanned with the original cover or reverse automatic document feeder open do not look directly at the light that may shine through the original glass Although the light that shines through the original glass is bright it is not a laser beam and therefore is not as dangerous 4 Touch Orig Copy o When making copies from a page spread such as an open book or magazine touch Book Copy The Original Copy screen appears 5 To specify the Original Direction Margin or Thick Original settings 3 Phot Application touch the appropriate key A Reference For details on specifying the Original Direction Margin or Thick Original settings refer to Specifying Conditions of the Original on page 3 40 Ready to copy 2 46 C350 2 10 Feeding the Document 6 Select the desired copy settings and then press the Start key Scanning of the document begins us Additional Information When using a setting where multiple document pages are to be scanned such as when making 2in1 copies the message shown below appe
23. ooooncnnnnnnnncininnonncccnnncnns 3 27 Books Book Copy Settings cooocoocccnccinccciocnnccccanccnnnccancnnnos 3 27 To specify Original settings 3 29 To specify Book Copy settings ceceeeeeseeeneeseeeeeeeeeenreeees 3 29 C350 v 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings oomcmmonnnnmsernennns 3 32 Single Sided Copy 1 Setting ooncocnnccnnnnnnncnnnccnonannccnnnnnnnnos 3 33 Double Sided Copy 2 Setting cceeccesceseeeseeeteeeeeeenees 3 33 Single Sided 2in1 Copy 1 2in1 Setting eee 3 33 Double Sided 2in1 Copy 2 2in1 Setting 3 33 Single Sided 4in1 Copy 1 4in1 Setting eee 3 34 Double Sided 4in1 Copy 2 4in1 Setting 3 34 Booklet Copy Booklet Setting ecccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 35 Bound Booklet Bind and Center Erase Settings 3 36 Conditions for Making Booklets secceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaes 3 37 Center Erasing Center Erase Setting 3 37 To specify Copy settings 3 38 To select the Bind setting 11iu adidas 3 39 3 9 Specifying Conditions of the Original a ar 3 40 Document Orientation Original Direction Setting 3 40 Document Binding Margin Position Margin Setting 3 41 Thick Documents Thick Original Setting eee 3 42 To specify conditions of the original a as 3 42 3 10 Selecting Photo Density
24. 3 14 C350 3 5 Specifying a Zoom Setting 3 To enter a Manual Zoom ratio 1 Touch Zoom A screen appears showing the available Zoom settings Touch Manual Zoom Using the keypad type in the desired zoom ratio between x0 250 and x4 000 The entered zoom ratio is displayed 4 Touch Enter The entered zoom ratio is specified as the Manual Zoom setting To store Manual Zoom ratios 1 Touch Zoom A screen appears showing the available Zoom settings Touch Manual Zoom Touch Store Input manual zoom ratio using numerical Key Or ig gt Copy PROTO ity Application Using the keypad type in the desired zoom ratio between x0 250 and x4 000 o To store a Minimal zoom ratio type in the desired zoom ratio between x0 900 and x0 999 The entered zoom ratio is displayed Touch 1 2 or Minimal Touch Enter The entered zoom ratio is stored C350 3 15 N _ D O al Basic Copy Operations Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 5 Specifying a Zoom Setting To recall a stored Manual Zoom ratio 1 Touch Zoom A screen appears showing the available Zoom settings 2 Touch Manual Zoom 3 Touch Set Input manual zoom ratio using numerical Key Pad 4 Touch 1 2 or Minimal 5 Touch Enter The stored zoom ratio is recalled 3 16 C350 3 5 Specifying a Zoom Setting 3 T
25. 9 In the Edge Frame Erase screen touch Enter o To cancel the Edge Frame Erase function touch Cancel in the Edge Frame Erase screen 10 If necessary specify any other copy settings 11 Press the Start key C350 7 13 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 6 Adjusting the Document Image Image Adjustment Function 7 6 Adjusting the Document Image Image Adjustment Function If the document size is different from the paper size the document image can be enlarged to fill the copy paper The image can be adjusted in either of the following two ways e Full Size Setting The entire document is enlarged to its maximum so that it fits fully within the paper without changing the proportions of the image e Center Zoom Setting The document is enlarged until its shorter sides fit fully within the paper without changing the proportions of the image R Hint When using the Image Adjustment function place the document on the original glass 7 14 C350 7 6 Adjusting the Document Image Image Adjustment Function 7 To use the Image Adjustment function 1 Place the document on the original glass N Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 N o a ok 99 E 0 2 Touch Application The Application screen appears 3 Touch Image Adjustment Application Functions Rea
26. Replace the paper See page 2 26 page 2 31 page 2 33 page 2 35 The document was not pressed close enough against the original glass Position the document so that itis pressed closely against the original glass See page 2 44 12 2 C350 12 1 When the Print Quality Is Low 12 Symptom Possible Cause Remedy There are dark specks or spots throughout the printed output There are streaks in the printed output The original glass is dirty Wipe the glass with a soft dry cloth See page 9 2 Either the document pad orthe document transfer belt is dirty Clean the document pad or the document transfer belt with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent See page 9 3 The original document is printed on highly translucent material such as diazo photosensitive paper or overhead projector transparencies Place a blank sheet of paper on top of the document See page 2 44 A double sided document is being copied If a thin double sided document is being copied the information on the back side may be reproduced in the copy Touch Density and then select a lighter Background setting for the Density parameter See page 3 44 The electrostatic charger is dirty Use the charger cleaning tool to clean the electrostatic charger See page 9 5 The image is not aligned properly on the paper GN The document is not po
27. The essentials of imaging KONICA MINOLTA bizhub c350 4 User s Guide Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine precautions on its use and basic troubleshooting procedures In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently carefully read this manual before using the machine After reading the manual store it in the designated holder so that it can easily be referred to when questions or problems arise during operation The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment C350 Contents IntroductioN aaa E E E E A EA i A A E E sega zeds ii Making Basic Copies c ccssecsseesseesseeeseneeseeenseeseeeseeeesseeseeeenseeneneeeeeneas xiv Available Features Selecting the print color c oncccnncnnncnnnccnnncnnncnnoccnncnnnarnrnnrnrncnnnc xvii SOrtingd COPIES mimi eari at ip eee ii oiei xvii Stapling copies ivi a aa xvii Punching holes in copies 11 a xvii Adjusting copies to the size of the paper sssr xviii Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios xviii Automatically selecting the paper 0 a xviii Reserving bypass tray copying ccoocccccoccccnnonncnnonnnnnarnncnanonnnrnn nos xviii Copying book documents coococcocccoccconcconccconcconnnnnnn aa xviii Separately copying the pages of a page spread
28. Touch Centering Touch the key for the desired setting Touch Enter Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again User s Choice 2 Paper Type Select ig small ori O select paper Sa Yes User s Choice 2 Set to center image 10 26 C350 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions Setting the Priority Output Tray Function This function is used to specify the output tray that is given priority for each application The default settings are tray 2 for copying and printing and faxing R Condition This function can be set only if the finisher FS 501 is installed Tray 3 is available only if the optional job separator is installed Nia Hint The applications referred to here are copying computer printing and Internet fax printing Internet faxing 1 Press the Utility key Touch User s Choice 2 Touch 3 3 bk OO N Touch Priority Output Tray User s Choice 2 Printer C350 10 27 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 5 Touch the
29. a xix Copying multiple document pages onto a single page xix Copying with a layout for center binding ooociiccnnininninnncnnno xix Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the Original ect nina s xix Copying a document containing various page sizes oo XX Printing a sample COPY 1 aaa XX Interrupting a COPY job oe ea XX Enlarging the touch panel screens a XX Checking the copy settings oooonccicccnnnnncncccnccncnncconcnnnnccnnncnancnnna XX Storing the scanned image in the memory conococcoccccccccocncancccnncanns XX Scanning the document in separate batches eeeeeees xxi Printing distribution numbers ON COPIES sssr xxi Making copies for filing oooooonconnnnconnncccnnonccnnaranornrrnnnnrnnnnns xxi Erasing sections Of copies ooooocccconcccnnoccnnnnancnnornnnnnarnnrnnnnnnnnn cnn xxi Adjusting the image to fit the paper SIZE da xxii Repeating copy images oocccoccccnonccononaconanononanrnnonnon nc nnnnnnnnnn cnn xxii Inserting paper between transparencies ecer xxii Copying booklet documents c oooconccccccccoccconcnnonccnoncnonnc a xxiii Improving the copy color quality ooocooocconnnccnononncnnncnnnonannnnn xxiii Copying with a background color eesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaes xxiii Separating the colors Of the copy eeceeseeseeeeteeeereeeteeeeeeeeaes xxiii Copying with reversed colors da xxiv Enlarging the image an
30. 10 10 4 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 1 Functions 6 Using the keypad type in the desired length of time between 10 and 240 minutes 7 Touch the appropriate key to specify whether or not the machine enters Power Save mode when a job is stored in the memory or a locked job is programmed 8 Touch Enter User s Choice 1 et time tr er You can prohibit transferring to Bouer Save JOb in Held or Locked Jobs when there is KB ni 104240 Mode queue Transferring to Power Save when Job is in Held Locked Jobs queue 9 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again 10 12 C350 10 4 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 1 Functions 10 Setting the Sleep Function This function is used to specify the length of time after the last operation until this machine automatically enters Sleep mode and whether or not the machine enters Sleep mode when a job is stored in the memory or a locked job is programmed The default setting is 30 min and Permit N Reference For more details refer to Turning the Machine On and Off on page 2 17 N Additional Information Jobs stored in the memory and locked jobs are erased when the machine enters Power Save mode or Sleep mode 1 Press the Utility key Touch User s Choice 1
31. Inserting paper between transparencies After each overhead transparency copy is printed a page can be added to the stack as an overleaf For details refer to Inserting Paper Between Transparencies OHP Interleave Function on page 7 21 xxii C350 Available Features Copying booklet documents Booklets with the staples removed can be copied and bound at the center to make booklet copies For details refer to Making Bound Booklets Booklet Original Function on page 7 23 LF dy SUL Improving the copy color quality EL By making various color adjustments you can adjust the quality of color copies as desired For details refer to Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters on page 7 26 Copying with a background color A document can be copied using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background blank areas For details refer to To make settings for the Background Color function on page 7 40 Separating the colors of the copy A document can be copied with its colors separated into cyan C magenta M yellow Y and black Bk In addition copies of the separated colors can be printed in just black For details refer to To make settings for the Color Separation function on page 7 42 C350 xxiii Available Features Copying with reversed colors A document can be copied with the light and dark c
32. Specifications Paper types Plain paper 17 to 24 Ib Paper sizes 12 1 4 X 18 L to 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L Power reguirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 17 W Dimensions 4 1 4 width X 17 1 4 depth X 13 1 2 height Weight 6 1 2 lb C350 13 3 Chapter 13 Specifications 13 13 1 Specifications Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF 601 Specifications Document feed methods Plain paper Single sided and double sided documents Thick paper Single sided documents 34 1 4 to 55 3 4 Ib Mixed Original function Single sided and double sided documents Document paper type Single sided Plain paper 9 1 4 to 34 lb Double sided or mixed Plain paper 13 1 4 to 29 1 4 Ib Document paper size Single sided double sided documents 11 X 17 L to 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L Mixed document sizes Refer to Table 1 Capacity of document feeder Single sided double sided documents Less than 100 sheets 21 1 4 Ib Thick original Less than 38 sheets 55 3 4 Ib Mixed document sizes Less than 100 sheets 21 1 4 Ib Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 60 W Dimensions 23 width X 20 1 2 depth X 5 1 4 height Weight 31 1 4 lb Table 1 Possible combinations for mixed document paper sizes Maximum Document Width gt 11x17 Letter Ledger Letter 5 1 2 x 5 1
33. _ 5 2 o lt Managing Jobs Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 8 2 Job Log Screens Active Scan Screen To display a list of jobs queued from Scan mode touch Active Scan To return to the Basic screen touch Basic To delete a job select the job and then touch Delete 2 L x Send Status 1 MIE A Inter ibi Ari MJ AA ji TA IS Address Orig Start Address _aaa bbb com 1 11 12 1 11 13 I Active ER ode Print F a Delete Seans Ea Fos d The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 Send mode Displays the transmission method 4 Status Displays the status of the job 5 Address Displays the name of the recipient 6 Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 7 Job start Displays the time that the job was queued 8 6 C350 8 2 Job Log Screens 8 Mode Check Screen Touch Mode Check The Mode Check screen containing the list of queued jobs appears To return to the To delete a job User 2 Name 1 E COPIER MI copier E copier MI correr COPIER Waitin 4 Print 11 19 Waitin i prine o 11 20 Waitin Pr
34. counters for other accounts continue selecting Volume numbers 8 Touch Clear The Individual Counter Clear screen appears 9 Touch Yes wO EIRE Track Individual Counter Clear 10 Touch Enter O The Total Large Size Duplex Copy and Scan counters for the selected account are initialized o The Upper Limit value is not initialized 11 To initialize the Volume Track Data E K C counters for all accounts touch All Counter Reset The All Counter Reset screen appears C350 10 103 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 12 Touch Yes Volume Track O CE KC 13 Touch Enter Do you want to clear the co o The Total Large A11 Counter Reset Size Duplex Copy and Scan counters for all accounts are initialized O The Upper Limit value is not initialized 14 Touch Enter The Volume Track E K C screen appears again 10 104 C350 10 12 Viewing Toner Usage Toner Coverage Function 1 0 10 12 Viewing Toner Usage Toner Coverage Function The total average usage ratio for each color of toner cyan magenta yellow and black can be checked The total average value is indicated in units of 0 001 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Toner g Coverage Utility U
35. ooonccccccnnnccncconnnonanananana nino canon anna nan cnanccnnnnnn 10 89 Volume track mode oooocinccccoccnacccincnnnanananananananncnancnnn 6 10 10 89 10 91 Volume track Seti an kn DB Late ai sm 10 93 C350 15 11 Chapter 15 Index Chapter 15 Index 1 B 15 1 Index When The following units need to be replaced soon appears 11 66 When the machine is not operating Correctly ccecce 12 5 When the message Malfunction detected appears neess 11 64 When the message Misfeed detected appears essere 11 20 When the message Please replace XXXX appears ccc 11 68 When the message Remove punch scraps appears eic 11 59 When the message Replace staple cartridge appears 11 11 When the message Replace the toner cartridge appears 11 4 MLN NO 3 17 ZOOM Ae eis acces eae ij nev ean de nadie Aas sil 10 17 Zoom fati0s ii tarada 14 3 Zodom settingS in ka J gei a 3 13 3 14 3 15 ZOOMING tdt dit 3 14 15 12 C350 KONICA MINOLTA www konicaminolta net Copyright Printed in Japan 4036 7702 01 2004 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC 2004 1
36. 5 Carefully pull off the seal 6 Insert the refilled staple cartridge holder until it locks into place 7 Slide the finisher back against the machine 11 14 C350 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears 11 Replacing the Staple Cartridge for FS 601 N Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears otherwise the machine may be damaged 1 Open the front door of the finisher 2 Turn misfeed clearing dial O clockwise until the removal indicator is completely blue N Hint If the dial is turned too far turn it counterclockwise to adjust it Removal indicator C350 11 15 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears 3 Slowly pull out the stapler unit as far as possible 4 Grasp both sides of the staple cartridge holder lift it up and then pull it out 5 Press the button marked PUSH on the side of the staple cartridge holder Staple case Staple cartridge O The staple case is released 11 16 C350 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears 11 6 Pull up the staple case 7 Remove the staple cartridge from the staple case 8 Load the staple cartridge holder cartridge with a new s
37. 51 Single sided 2in1 copy 52 Double sided 2in1 copy 53 Single sided 4in1 copy 54 Double sided 4in1 copy 55 Booklet 56 Booklet Original 57 Booklet Bind 58 Non Sort 59 Sort 60 Corner Staple 61 2 Staples 62 Hole Punch 63 OHP Interleaving 64 File Margin 65 Edge Frame Erase G6 image Repeat 67 Mirror Image 68 Set Numbering 69 Postcard 70 Multi Page Enlargement 71 Image Adjustment 72 Single Color 78 Background Color 74 Neg Pos Reverse 75 Color Separation Black 76 Color Separation Each 77 Mixed Original 78 Separate Scan 79 nterrupt 80 Portrait S1 Red 82 Blue 83 Green 84 Hue 85 Saturation 86 Brighiness 87 Sharpness 88 Color Balance 89 Copy Density 90 Contrast 91 Sample Copy 92 Centering 93 Mdoe Store 94 Copy Program Recall 95 Copy 1 Set 96 Volume Track E K C 97 Key counter 98 Vendor 14 29 C350 14 3 Function Combination Table 14 8 hes 1 Adoo ojojojojojojojojoj ojojofjojojojojojojo lt a lt jofojojo lt af lt afojo 1 jojojojojojojojojojojol gt o 1 1 o o b 3 iesey ue16014 Ado P b b b bb b b b b Db gt gt gt gt
38. C350 7 9 Making Bound Booklets Booklet Original Function 7 7 9 Making Bound Booklets Booklet Original Function N o a ok 99 E 0 Booklets with their staples removed can be copied and bound to create booklet copies R Condition The Booklet Original function is only available if the optional finisher FS 601 is installed To use the Booklet Original function Application Functions 1 Remove the staples from the booklet document to be copied and then position it Nex Additional Information The document can be positioned in either of the following ways When placed on the original glass Position each page spread out in the following order the side with the first page the side with the second page the side with the third page etc C350 7 23 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 9 Making Bound Booklets Booklet Original Function When using the reverse automatic document feeder Spread out the booklet from the middle and then load it into the reverse automatic document feeder with the front cover at the top S Reminder Be sure to load a document consisting of 2 to 10 pages If the document consists of too many pages the booklet cannot be bound 2 Touch Application The Application screen appears 3 Touch Booklet Original PERSE r ET Application LA pe OOO ara 5 Separat
39. Ifjobs are combined while any of the following settings are selected the setting changes to the default Number of copies set to 1 Hole punching turned off Stapling turned off Set Numbering function turned off If accounts have been specified from the Utility mode the screen for entering the account access code appears after Combine Jobs is touched Using the keypad type in the 8 digit access code and then touch Enter R Condition The following functions cannot be used together with the Combine Jobs function Multi Page Enlargement function Postcard function Image Repeat function Color Separation function OHP Interleave function To return to the Basic screen touch Basic To delete a job select the job and then touch Delete C350 8 17 Chapter 8 Managing Jobs Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 3 Job Control Screens iero 6 Nane Status Dest File Name Orig Copy Mew Select jobs to combine MEY COPIER 22 req Elev IRL COPIER t rea if COPIER Sterea Elev 1 1 16 18 user The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is gueued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing
40. O 19 Front D door x 1 o 2 O m button Job Separator 18 Drawer release 15 Job separator im Sr 16 Right side door 7 Large capacity paper feed cabinet No Part Name Description 15 Job separator optional Collects printed pages Large capacity Paper Feed Cabinet No Part Name Description 16 Right side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 17 Large capacity paper feed Holds up to 2 500 sheets of paper cabinet 18 Drawer release button Press to open the drawer Finisher FS 501 No Part Name Description 19 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 20 Secondary paper output tray Collects copies that are sorted sorted copies 21 Primary paper output tray Collects copies that are not sorted made with the Non Sort non sorted copies setting 22 Upper cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 2 10 C350 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions Inside of Machine 1 Toner cartridge securing 5 Imaging unit securing lever 4 Charger cleaning tool 2 Right side door 3 LED cleaning tool No Part Name Description 1 Toner cartridge securing Used when installing and replacing the toner cartridges lever 2 Right side door Opened when replacing the fusing unit or clearing misfeeds 3 LED cleaning tool Us
41. Touch 2 2 User s Choice 1 A OO N Touch Sleep Account Change i AUTO Reset 5 Press the C clear key The currently specified value is erased C350 10 13 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 4 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 1 Functions Using the keypad type in the desired length of User s Choice 1 Set time to transfer to Sleep Mode time between 15 and fou can Prohibit transferring to Sleep Mode when s in Held or Locked Jobs queue 240 minutes Touch the appropriate o E key to specify whether mpn or not the machine Transferring to sigep when Job in Held Locked Jobs queue enters Sleep mode when a job is stored in L the memory or a locked job is programmed Touch Enter Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again N Condition To set the machine so that it will not enter Sleep mode set the Disable Sleep Mode function on the Admin Set screen in Administrator mode to Yes If the Disable Sleep Mode function is set to Yes No appears in the Sleep screen 1 Set Lime to transfer to Sleep Mode You can
42. Utility Mode Operations 5 Touch Volume Track Mode E K C Volume Tr Setting lt E C350 10 89 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 6 Touch the key for the desired setting Volume Track PO CE KC i ate Enable Disable Volume Track E K C o When Yes is selected the keys below Scanning from PC become available Touch the key for the desired setting Scanning from PC Prohibit x Reference For details on remote scanning refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide x Additional Information If the Volume Track Mode E K C function is set to Yes specify the volume number and access number For details on specifying the setting refer to Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions on page 10 89 7 Touch Enter Volume Track mode E K C is set 10 90 C350 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 1 0 Canceling Volume Track Mode E K C The procedure for canceling Volume Track mode E K C is described below N Reminder In order to cancel the Volume Track mode E K C all Volume Track Data E K C counters must be initialized If No is selected in the Initialize scre
43. When a different paper drawer is automatically selected the next paper drawer in the following list is chosen First priority 2nd drawer Second priority 3rd drawer Third priority 4th drawer Fourth priority 1st drawer C350 4 7 Chapter 4 Copy Paper Chapter 4 Copy Paper 4 4 4 Special Paper 4 4 Special Paper The paper loaded into the 2nd 3rd or 4th drawer can be specified as special paper If the paper in a drawer is specified as special paper the paper in that drawer is not automatically selected with the Auto Paper Select setting However that paper will automatically be selected if the Paper Type Select function is set to Single Sided Only This function is useful if special paper is loaded into a paper drawer For details refer to Setting the Paper Type Select Function on page 10 21 4 8 C350 Original Documents Original Documents Chapter 5 Chapter 5 Original Documents 5 5 1 Document Feeding 5 1 Document Feeding Document Feeding Methods The document can be fed in either of the following two ways Be sure to position the document correctly according to the type of document being copied N Reference For details on feeding the document refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 Document Feed Method Features Using the reverse automatic document feeder Using the reverse automatic document feeder a mult
44. o Touch Y until the cursor moves below the digit that you wish to change and to select the length of side Y for the paper that is loaded 9 Touch either 1 or 2 Ready Eo copy 10 Touch Enter and then touch Enter in the Custom Size screen The custom paper size is stored To select a stored non standard custom paper size Non standard paper sizes that are already stored in the machine can be recalled and used The following procedure describes how to recall a size for non standard paper loaded into the 1st drawer 1 Touch Paper Size A screen appears showing the available Paper Size settings 2 Touch the key for the 1st drawer and then touch Change Size O For the bypass tray touch Bypass The Size Input screen appears 3 Touch Custom Size The Custom Size screen appears 3 24 C350 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting 3 4 Touch either 1 or 2 to select the paper size Ready to copy 5 Touch Enter and then touch Enter in the Size Input screen The paper size for the 1st drawer is set to the recalled size To specify the Bypass Reserve settings for the bypass tray o D O lt If paper of the desired size or type is not loaded into any paper drawer or the bypass tray the Bypass Reserve settings can be specified so that printing can begin when paper of the appropriate size is loaded into the bypass tra
45. uos uog uoy Copy 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 pulg 19pto0g PUIbLO 1911908 hepioog doo Luly pepis e gnog doo pup pepis e 6urg doo ulg pepis elqnog doo uiz pepis e 6ulg doo pepis ejqnoq doo p p s juis ojojojojojojo wv jojojojojojo Original usen ojojojojojojojo ojojojojojo juonoeuig peuiuO ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo vivjojo w w wv w wv w wjojojojojo pee1ds kdog 1008 O T vivivjojo v v v v w v wvjojojojojo uonesedas dog 1008 O ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo w wvjojojojojojojojojo w ojojojojojo eui6110 pepis ajqnog w w wjojojojojojojojojo w ojojojojojo euib1o pepis e 6ulg ojojojojojojojajojajojajajajafjojojojojo Density epon Asso o ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo IIEUI LIO XEN 100 ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo jueweoueyuy pe L1edey p idoo yjvjvyjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojvyjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo o e eBeuj pound wijvwivjvj ojojojojojojojojojoJo oJojoJojoJojo jojojo O ied d oroya v vw wjojvjojojojojojojojojojo ojo oJojoJojojojo ojo O Oo dew vyjivyjvjvjojvjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo O oioud PIXEL w y y v v o o jo o jo o jo o o o
46. 14 Output yound 6 0H A O o sedas z v aders 19u00 ajaja hos v ojojo uos uoy Ajojajaja A A O A Copy pulg 1eptoog wjojojojojo v O eu6uo 19 1008 A A hapjoog v v wvjojojojojo doo up papis eiqnoq wivjv vj ojojojojo Kdoo purp pepis e 6u1s vivivijv vjojojojojo Ado puig pepis eiqnoq viv vivjv vjojojojojo Adoo puz pepis ojbuis viviviviv viviviviv A jajajajajajajojojojojo Ados pepis jqnoq wivivivivivivivjojojojojo O doo popis o buis olafafalalalafafajo lolafaja olalalafaja lafala ofafaja a ojafajajalalafafjajo ajajaja olala lafaja laflala ofof aja a Original use o Oo a luonseaig reuibuo D D o pea1ds Adog 008 uoyesedes Ado9 1008 reu6uo pep s e anog o o o oj o jo euro papis e 6u s O Density epon Asso 9 IEU6LO xuen 100 huowevueyug per ieded perdoo eeuw pojuud ied d ojoya ey oroyd sel wer ene punoibyoeg Ausuep punou6y eg ony 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 56 59 60 61 62 eno Asueq ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojojojY ojojojojojojojoJoJo ojoJo Jo v v ojo v v o o o o o o ojojojojo ja ojo v v ojo
47. 4 Origin t ala 3 Inthe Creation screen touch Mirror Image Ready ta copy Creation Postcard gt C350 7 51 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 4 Normally the document size is lected pape it is reflected Image Of original will be copied on per as automatically detected OrigrCopy PRS on However if you wish to lt x specify the document Cance1 Enter size touch Original o Qriginal Size Input A i Auto i Detect 5 Select the document size and then touch Enter 11140 6 Ifthe desired document size is not listed touch Other Sizes to display a screen containing additional document sizes O Select the appropriate document size and F then touch Enter Ready to copy Original Size 7 To specify a photo size or a non standard size touch Photo Size or Custom Size 7 52 C350 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions O 8 In the Mirror Image screen touch Enter Select a photo size or touch X and Y and touch and to select the size of the original and then touch Enter Ready to copy Chapter 7 Application Functions O To cancel the Mirror Image function touch Cancel in the Mirror Image screen 9 If necessary s
48. 7 40 C350 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 4 Select the desired color and then touch Enter O The colors are listed on two screens Touch Background Color 2 in the lower right corner to display the next screen Touch Background Color 1 to return to the previous screen To cancel the Background Color function touch Cancel in either Background screen Choose background color for output Pumpkin Green Maroon Choose background color for output pplication eances Enter E Background color 1 di 5 If necessary specify any other copy settings 6 Press the Start key C350 7 41 Chapter 7 Application Functions Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions To make settings for the Color Separation function This function allows you to make copies of a document with its colors separated into cyan C magenta M yellow Y and black Bk In addition copies of the separated colors can be printed in just black 1 Position the document s to be copied S Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Application and then touch Creation Ready to copy Application Color mage Adjustment 4 Pa Y enter laa 4 Original 4 ae Creati
49. Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Copy Density 3 Touch 4 acted And to select the desired setting and then touch Enter o Tocancelthe Copy Density function touch Cancel in the Copy Density screen N Additional Information Ready to copy olor Image i Adi stment 4 mage di stment 4 Creation E Photo Density A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39 7 38 C350 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters 7 To make sample copies From each screen for the Color Image Adjust parameters you can make Sample Copies of your document to see how it will appear with the currently specified color adjustment settings 1 Load paper into the 1st drawer R Hint Select a paper size of A4 C A3 L Letter C or 11 x 17 L 2 Inthe screen for the Color Image Adjustment parameter touch Sample Copy The Sample Copy screen appears Example Adjusting the Brightness parameter 3 Place the document within the sample area of the original glass R Hint Position within the sample area the part of the document to be printed in
50. O Middle position GS Lower position C350 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 5 Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel To adjust the angle of the control panel 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you and then push down on the control panel The angle of the control panel stops at the middle position 2 To adjust the control panel to an even steeper angle pull the control panel release lever toward you and then push down on the control panel The angle of the control panel stops at the lower position 2 24 C350 2 5 Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel 3 To return the control panel to the upper position pull the control panel release lever toward you and then pull up on the control panel C350 2 25 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 6 Loading Paper Into the 1st Drawer 2 6 Loading Paper Into the 1st Drawer R Reference For details on specifying the paper size for the 1st drawer refer to To specify the size of the paper in the 1st drawer on page 3 19 1 Pull out the paper drawer for the 1st drawer 2 Press down on the paper lifting plate until it locks into place S Reminder Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take up roller with your hands Paper lifting 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper
51. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations This device must be used with a shielded network 10 Base T 100 Base TX cable and a shielded parallel cable The use of non shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules C350 1 5 Chapter 1 Installation and Operation Precautions Chapter 1 Installation and Operation Precautions 1 1 1 For Safe Use INTERFERENCE CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD ICES 003 ISSUE 3 For Canada Users This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada For Users in count
52. This function is used to allow access codes to be entered again after access has been denied Nes Additional Information If input of the administrator code is denied turn this machine off then on again 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 2 4 6 Touch Access Lock Release O Admin Set Disable No Prohibit Box Function Prohibit 7 Touch the key for the K SE access code that you CA y Release access locked due to unauthorized access wish to allow input Select access to be unlocked and press Enter Access Lock Release 8 Touch Enter o To return to the Admin Set screen touch Cancel The access lock is canceled 9 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 10 42 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 Setting the User Authentication Function This function is used to select whether user authentication is required in order to enter Scan mode or Mailbox mode after the Scan key or the Box key is pressed In addition user authentication can be performed with Active Directory or NTLM The default setting is No N Reference For details on the Scan mod
53. a 20 2 to 5 bound pages oO lt Number of bound pages 2 to 10 Maximum 40 pages O Paper sizes Letter L 11 x17L Width Maximum 11 3 4 in Minimum 8 1 4 in Length Maximum 17 in Minimum 11 in The Bind setting is available only if the optional finisher FS 601 is installed Center Erasing Center Erase Setting When making copies using the Booklet and Bind settings this setting erases the area along the binding at the center of the pages Basic Copy Operations C350 3 37 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings To specify Copy settings 1 Touch Orig Copy The Original Copy screen appears 2 Select the desired Copy setting O To select 4in1 or double sided 2in1 copying or booklet copying touch 4in1 Booklet Ready to copy 3 38 C350 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings 3 To select the Bind setting N Hint Bind appears only if the optional finisher FS 601 is installed 1 Touch Orig Copy The Original Copy screen appears 2 Touch 4in1 Booklet The 4in1 Booklet screen appears 99 _ D O lt 3 Touch Booklet Bind appears Vex Hint As the factory default Bind is not selected Ready to copy Booklet Basic Copy Operations 4 Touch Bind Center Erase appears
54. appears A log of all jobs scanned in Scan mode can be viewed from the Scan Log screen In addition the jobs can be divided into separate lists of those that have finished being transmitted and those that have been deleted To view a list of completed scan jobs touch Finished Jobs To view a list of jobs that have been deleted after being queued touch Deleted Jobs To return to the Basic screen touch Basic 2 Mode Address Orig Stars tos Result Job Status 1 iet xxx yyy com 1 11 36 11 37 von deleved by abc def com 1 11 36 11 36 user te by Job deleted ser ccc bbb com The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 Send mode Displays the transmission method 4 Address Displays the name of the recipient 5 Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 6 Job start Displays the time that the job was queued 7 Job end Displays the time when the job was finished 8 Result Displays the job process details 9 Job status Displays details of any errors that may have occurred while the job was being performed 8 10 C350 8 3 Job Control Screens 8 8 3 Job Control Screens Jobs stored in the m
55. gt Set the power switch to 1 ss g When the Machine Is Turned On 1 The indicator on the Start key lights up in orange A screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears 2 After a few seconds the message Now warming up Ready to scan appears on the touch panel and the indicator on the Start key lights up in green A job can now be queued Queuing a Job During Warm Up gt Ajob can be queued while the machine warms up after it is turned on After the machine has finished warming up after about 99 seconds at normal room temperature 73 4 F the scanned image is printed Panel Reset Timer e f no operation is performed for the specified length of time if the optional key counter is removed settings that have not been programmed in the machine such as the number of copies are cleared and all modes and functions return to their default settings e This is the panel reset timer operation e As the factory default the panel reset timer operation is performed after 1 minute C350 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 3 Turning the Machine On and Off N Reference For details on the default settings refer to Default Settings on page 2 21 e The time until the panel reset timer operation is performed and whether or not itis performed can be set from Administrator mode For details refer to Setting the
56. load them with the longer side as the leading edge as shown Do not load overhead projector transparencies lengthwise Crosswise Lengthwise mM 2 28 C350 2 6 Loading Paper Into the 1st Drawer R Reminder When loading postcards load them with the shorter side as the leading edge as shown Do not load postcards crosswise Lengthwise S gt Crosswise O Si 6 If paper of a non standard size has been loaded slide the lateral guides against the edges of the loaded paper 7 Close the paper drawer for the 1st drawer C350 2 29 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 6 Loading Paper Into the 1st Drawer 8 Turn the media type selection dial to the setting for the type of paper loaded Setting Paper Type Notes Plain Plain Paper Plain Second side of During manual adouble sided double sided copy on plain copying paper Thick1 Thick paper 1 When using label sheets Thick1 Second side of During manual adouble sided double sided copy on thick copying paper 1 Thick2 Thick paper 2 When using postcards Thick2 Second side of During manual adouble sided double sided copy on thick copying paper 2 Thick3 Thick paper 3 Thick3 Second side of During manual adouble sided double sided copy on
57. ofojojofo gt o 1 1 JOJOJOJO 3 hucunenipy obeu Oj P P O O P TP Leal oc Od Lal O O JO d4 dJOJOJA JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJP 4 1 1 OJOJOJO Je fusus obean O P P a P O D P P D LD at ec La lt jojojo lt ajajo lt LJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJP A I 1 lt afjofjojo G preojsog O P P P OP P LP O LD dTA JOJOJO 4 AJOJAJAJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJP A I 1 AJOJOJO 8 Bunequiny yes ojojojojojojojojoj ojofjojo lt jojo lt a lt lt I afajajajajajajojol lt jojojojojojojojojojojo gt jof 1 fofjojojo Jobeuy sou o0 jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj lt gt lt 4 lt 4 0 0 0jojojojojoj lt 4 ojojojojojojojojojojoj jojijijojojojo 8 ieedey oew O P P P OOP lt O AP LTL dJOJOJO 4 AT AJOJTJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO P A I 1 JOJOJOJO 5 8 ose ower3 06p3 ojojojojojojojojojofojojojojojo ojojojo lt jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo jo 1 jojojojo 3 3 usen ong ojojojojojojo lt jojofjojojojojo O d4 OJO 4 AP AJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO PJOJIIOJO O O g suneenenu ano Oj 1 0 O dd d ojo lt joj A APAJOJOJOJ AJ AJOJOJ A JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO D O Oo o o b 1 alala 5 5 vs 3 EEEL gt 2 al SAAN ES alzlelelele 5 HE F dese Bell lel Ll Ehk ERI CIE RIELE alal le LELEI 3 RRR RL Sl Els El el lel lall EEE le sl8l81318 1 leiglelelels E Sle s 58 5 8 le 3 le lass
58. stment 4 Ready to copy Postcard a If the Single Color setting was selected the negative positive inverse of the image will be printed with the selected color If the Background Color function was set the negative positive inverse of the image will include the selected background color 7 44 C350 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 7 To make settings for the Multi Page Enlargement function This function allows you to copy a document automatically split into parts with each part printed enlarged These copies can then be put together to make a large poster N 0 a ok Oo E 0 1 Position the document s to be copied N Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Application and then touch Creation Application Functions Ready to copy Application Color Image Adjustment Fa Edge Frame j Erase 4 Inter e E QHP leau 3 In the Creation screen touch Multi Page Enlargemt Ready to copy Orig gt Copy Density Creation F Postcard C350 7 45 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 4 Normally the document size is automatically detected However if you wish to specify the document size touch Ori
59. the paper in that drawer is not automatically selected with the Auto Paper Select setting The Paper Type Select function is useful if special paper is loaded into a paper drawer For details refer to Setting the Paper Type Select Function on page 10 21 Manual Paper Selection The drawer containing the appropriate paper that you wish to use can be selected for copying Bypass Tray Selection Bypass Setting Copies are produced using paper loaded into the bypass tray Bypass Reserve Settings for Bypass Tray The document can be scanned in advance even when no tray or drawer contains paper of the appropriate size After paper of the appropriate size is loaded into the bypass tray the copy is printed 3 18 C350 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting 3 To select the paper drawer 1 Touch Paper Size A screen appears showing the available paper drawers 2 Touch the key for the desired paper drawer Ready to copy Chapter 3 Bypass Reserve 4 To specify the size of the paper in the 1st drawer Since the size of standard sized paper loaded into the 1st drawer is automatically detected it is usually not necessary to set the paper size However it may be necessary to set the paper size if non standard sized paper is loaded or if the paper size is not automatically detected for some reason N Reference For details on loading the paper into the 1st drawer refer to Loadin
60. thick paper 2 thick paper 3 overhead projector transparencies postcards or label sheets 10 sheets envelopes Warm up time Less than 99 seconds at room temperature 73 4 F Image loss Leading edge 3 16 5 mm Trailing edge 1 8 3 mm Rear edge 1 8 3 mm Front edge 1 8 3 mm First page print time Full color Less than 12 8 seconds Black Less than 6 8 seconds for Letter C paper loaded into the 1st drawer Copy speed Full color black using the 1st drawer 22 35 sheets Letter C 11 18 sheets 11 X 17 L 22 35 sheets 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L Magnification ratios Full size X1 000 Enlargement ratios X1 214 X1 294 X1 545 and X2 000 Reduction ratios X0 785 X0 733 X0 647 X0 500 and minimal X0 930 Zoom ratios X0 250 to X4 000 in X0 001 increments and 3 memory Zoom ratios 13 2 C350 13 1 Specifications 1 3 Chapter 13 Specifications Specifications Multiple copies 1 to 999 sheets Density control Copy density Manual Background density Automatic and manual Power requirements 120 127 V 12 A or less 60 Hz Power consumption 120 V Less than 1 4 kW Dimensions 35 1 2 width X 28 3 4 depth X 30 1 4 height Space requirements 40 width X 45 1 4 depth Memory 256 MB Can be increased to a maximum of 512 MB Weight 220 1 4 lb without the imaging units and original cover installed Automatic Duplex Unit AD 501
61. 1 2 From the HDD screen touch the job to be printed Touch Open Job Touch Hold Job Check that the selected job is listed in the Hold Job screen R Additional Information Jobs retrieved as stored jobs can be prioritized or combined before being printed For details refer to Increase Priority Screen on page 8 15 or Combine Jobs Screen on page 8 17 Select the job that you wish to print o To delete multiple jobs continue selecting all desired jobs Touch OK C350 8 21 fo _ 5 2 O lt Managing Jobs Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 8 3 Job Control Screens Reprint Screen N Condition Ifthe Reprint function in Administrator mode has been set to Yes the Reprint screen is available jobs can be recalled from the memory However if the Reprint function has been set to No all jobs are erased after they are finished being printed The Reprint screen is not available For details on setting the Reprint function refer to Setting the Reprint Function on page 10 50 Past copy jobs can be recalled and printed again Up to 49 past copy jobs are saved If the number of copy jobs exceeds 49 or the memory becomes full jobs are deleted starting from the oldest Deleted jobs cannot be recalled Touch Reprint The Reprint screen containing the list of printed jobs appears R Additional Information Ifaccounts have b
62. 11 3 4 A6 X 0 500 B5 X 0 866 B6 X 0 610 A3 Xx 1 414 B4 X 1 224 A5 A6 X 0 707 148 mm X 210 mm 5 3 4 X 8 1 4 B6 X 0 866 A4 X 1 414 A3 X 2 000 B4 X 1 733 B5 X 1 224 A6 A4 X 2 000 105 mm X 148 mm 4 1 4 X 5 3 4 AS X 1 414 B5 X 1 733 B6 X 1 224 B4 A4 X 0 816 257 mm X 364 mm 10 X 14 1 4 AS X 0 577 B5 X 0 707 B6 X 0 500 A3 X 1 154 B5 A5 X 0 816 182 mm X 257 mm 7 1 4X 10 A6 X 0 577 B6 X 0 707 A3 X 1 640 A4 X 1 154 B4 X 1 414 C350 14 3 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 1 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables B6 A6 X 0 816 128 mm X 182 mm 5X7 1 4 A4 X 1 640 A5 Xx 1 154 B4 X 2 000 B5 X 1 414 English Sizes Document Paper Size Desired Paper Size Zoom Ratio Ledger 11X14 X 0 823 11x17 279 4 mm X 431 8 mm Legal X 0 722 Foolscap X 0 764 Letter X 0 647 Invoice X 0 500 11X15 11X14 X 0 933 279 4 mm X 381 mm Legal X 0 772 Foolscap X 0 772 Letter X 0 733 Invoice X 0 500 11x 14 Legal X 0 772 279 4 mm X 355 6 mm Foolscap X 0 772 Letter X 0 772 Invoice X 0 500 Legal Foolscap X 0 928 8 1 2 X 14 215 9 mm X 355 6 mm Letter X 0 785 Invoice X 0 607 11x17 x 1 214 Foolscap Letter X 0 846 8 1 2 X 13 7 215 9 mm X 330 2 mm Invoice X 0 647 11x17 X 1 294 11x14 X 1 076 Letter Invoice X 0 647 8 1 2 X 11 215 9 mm X 279 4 mm 11x17 X 1 294 11x 14 X 1 272 14 4 C350
63. 3 f your hands become soiled with toner immediately wash them with soap and water f toner gets in your eyes immediately flush them with water and then seek professional medical attention A CAUTION Used toner cartridges In order to prevent the used toner cartridge from dirtying anything keep it in the box gt Dispose of the used toner cartridge according to your local regulations 11 6 C350 11 2 When the Message Replace the Toner cartridge Appears 1 1 Replacing the Toner Cartridge The procedure for replacing any of the toner cartridges yellow Y magenta M cyan C or black Bk is the same The following procedure describes the replacement of the yellow toner cartridge as an example R Reminder Be careful about the installation location of the toner cartridges since it is different for other colors 1 Open the front door and then swing down counterclockwise the toner cartridge securing lever for the toner cartridge that you wish to replace 2 Pull out the empty toner cartridge R Reminder In order to prevent the used toner cartridge from dirtying anything keep it in the box Dispose of the used toner cartridge according to your local regulations C350 11 7 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 11 11 2 When the Message Replace the Toner cartridge Appears 3 Prepare the
64. 4 7 8 page Hole gt Punch Original Direction PA 2 5 6 2 Staples i 3 4 7 8 Lengthwise i the page Hole Punch T5 5 6 2 Staples 3 4 lm 17 8 page C350 14 9 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications Single Sided Document Double Sided Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner 7 gt Staple 1 2 3 page gt Corner Staple 7 gt 1 Turn the page Hole 7 gt 2 Punch Original Direction N 1 Tam 3 2 Staples Crosswise page y Hole Punch 2 Staples gt gt 1 Turn the page Corner gt Staple 1 Turn 3 the page Corner 2 Staple gt Y 1 Turn 3 the RES page Hole Punch Original Direction 5 gt Lengthwise o 1 jum 2 3 2 Staples page Hole 2 Punch gt 2 Staples Turn 3 the page 14 10 C350 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 1 4 Chapter 14 Appendix
65. 8 Creation functions iii de 7 40 Grisscross MA 2 1 ds Areas rs Bee dotan da 10 20 Giiss foss SONING dmi eaea a tt 3 9 Custom paper size cooooocncccnccccoccnocccnonccnnnnononcnncnnnnnnnn nn nan nenncnnnnnnns 3 22 3 23 Bate Time s t 1 tetitas lia a oi eee 10 48 Default settings aaa 2 21 10 10 10 16 A E 8 3 8 12 Deleting Copy JODS cional 3 4 Deleting data ir anton u e atada 8 12 DOS E T 7 38 15 4 15 1 Index 15 Density Settings eiii cet eee a dki as uses Disable sleep mode 1 der s Document orientation ooooccccccnnncccccnncocnccccnnnnnnnnnncnnnanannncnnnannnrnccnnnnnnns Document transfer belt Document types iekalts iv A a trs kak Double sided 2in1 copy Double sided 4in1 copy Double sided COPY iiid aaa Double sided original ssiis aaa D ring Warm Up ssxc sos diegs Edge Frame erase cccocccncccnoncconcnonnnconcnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn aa 7 10 Electrostatic charger z zu dara ia dla eet ito ees 9 5 Enlarge casi adele a tad kis as lie AR aa eed 3 13 Enlarged display clear check oooooocccccnccccccccccconoccnonnnnnnncnonnnnnancccnnnnnnns 6 14 Ehvelop ds cele dd eg ee ie ie Kia 2 26 Erasing clonar eden 7 10 Expert user mode e a a E 10 69 Feeding documents aaa 2 41 2 44 5 2 14 6 File marginar atsegtas akas ea 7 8 Finisher FS 501 e taste 11 12 11 41 11 50 13 7 Finisher FS 601 coooccconoccccnoocccononcnnoncnnnnnnnononnnos 11 15 11 46 11 53 13 6 BUI COIO Katine AM teeta iets
66. 9 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again Admin Set Disable No Prohibit Prohibit Admin Set LDAP Search Permit Prohibit Select to permit or prohibit LDAP search Enter 10 46 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 Setting the Box Function Expansion Function This function is used to select whether or not mailbox functions are expanded The default setting is Prohibit R Reference For details on mailbox function expansion refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code Oo Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 2 4 6 Touch Box Function 7 Touch the key for the desired setting 8 Touch Enter 9 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again F O Admin Set No Prohibit Prohibit Admin Set Select whether to permit or prohibit Box Function Enter Box Function Pernit Prohibit C350 10 47 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Util
67. Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations 6 6 4 Interrupting a Copy Job Interrupt Mode 6 4 Interrupting a Copy Job Interrupt Mode The copy job being printed can be interrupted This is useful for pausing the current copy job in order to make a quick copy of a different document N Reference For details on interrupting a copy job when printing of the current job is finished without interrupting the copy job being printed refer to Increase Priority Screen on page 8 15 N Hint Some copy functions cannot be interrupted In addition certain functions cannot be set if this machine is in Interrupt mode For details refer to the Function Combination Table on page 14 25 To interrupt copying 1 Press the Interrupt key while a copy job is being printed The indicator on the Interrupt key lights up o The message Now in Interrupt mode appears At this point printing of the job before the interruption continues o The copy settings return to their defaults The copy settings for the job before the interruption and the remaining number of copies are recorded o If no operation is performed for the specified length of time after the Interrupt key is pressed the Interrupt mode is automatically canceled The length of time until the Interrupt mode is canceled is the same length of time until the auto panel reset operation is performed For details on specifying the time for the auto pan
68. Corner tika Staple 78 7 gt 12 Turn 9 10 th 7 3 4 nage 1112 E MER to A Hole y gt 56 eal Punch Original Direction ba Fi he 7 844 49 2 Staples Crosswise page Hole 56 Punch 78 2 Staples gt 12 Tum 9 10 3 4 age 1112 Corner gt 5 6 Staple 1 2 Tum 7 8 2 10 3 4 the 11 12 page 5 6 Corner 7 8 Staple 1 2 ld 9 10 3 4 pe 12 page Hole a C Punch Original Direction p4 2 laa 9 10 2 Staples Lengthwise 23 4 the 11 12 page 5 6 Hole 7 8 Punch Falls 19 2 Staples F 3 4 jne Ltt 12 page 14 12 C350 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 14 Left Bound Double Sided Documents Left Bound Double Sided Document Single Sided Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen 5 Corner Staple ti 2 page 7 gt 112 page Hole gt Punch jum 2 2 Staples Original Direction j page Crosswise Hole Punch 2 Staples TE p 1 Tum 2 page Corner gt Staple 1 Turn 2 the page gt 1 Turn 2 the page Hole gt Punch Original Direction 1 Tum 2 2 Staples Lengthwise u the page Ho
69. Delete Time No No 6 Touch the key forthe p i A Admin Set desired setting tek Set whether or not to skip over to the next Job when current Job A T oye due to reaching max Volume Track E K C gt 7 Touch Entod SEIR popupe ip ack Brera 8 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again C350 10 39 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings Setting the Access Lock Function This function is used to specify penalties for incorrect access attempts when the administrator code account access number or unlocking code for locked jobs are incorrectly entered The default setting is Disable N Condition If this function is set to Enable entering an incorrect access number administrator code account access number or unlocking code for locked jobs a total of three times consecutively for the account access number and unlocking code for locked jobs will result in input of the access number being denied For account access number the number of incorrect attempts is counted separately for each account The following message appears when input of the administrator code is denied Utility Access denied due to unauthorized access Cannot enter Administr
70. Function Combination Table 14 14 3 Function Combination Table Function Combination Table t Je deyo xipuaddy Zoom wooz AX indus yenueyy wooz yenuey je61e U3 eonpey 9ZIS N4 sy wooz ony Paper type attribute Auo pepis albuls Aure oeds jaded Amend UPIH ojojojojojojojojo sedojonuz dHO pepis eiqnop e saded sory 1oded yoy popis ejanop z seded sory Iz seded yoy popis o1qnop 1eded yoy 1 Jaded yoy popis o1qnop 1 ded urejd ojojojojojojojojo Paper 12 13 14715 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 fen ssed q 10 Bues uoljemiasey jojojojojojojojojo fen ssed g ejdiiny 10 11 eulgeo pee 1edeq wv w v ojojojojojojojojo 9 emer 154 8 Sdv pales Jedeg omy ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo Color Dela wv jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo jooo Z v wvjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo 19199 114 v wv vjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojojojojojo Sov 40109 omy ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo Document Gutpeey enue ojojojojojajojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojo ojojojojojajojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojo 1epee4 JUS
71. Hint Ifthe original cover is installed clean the original cover pad in the same way by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent C350 9 3 Chapter 9 Care of the Machine 9 9 1 Cleaning 2 Carefully slide the belt to the left to expose a hidden area of the belt Clean the newly exposed surface of the belt by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent as in step 1 Repeat the above step until the entire surface of the document transfer belt has been wiped clean Paper Take Up Roller gt Clean the paper take up rollers by wiping them with a soft dry cloth C350 9 1 Cleaning 9 Electrostatic Charger If the electrostatic charger is dirty streaks will appear though the copies If this occurs clean the charger according to the following procedure 1 Open the machine s front door 2 Slowly pull out the charger cleaning tool as far as possible Next slowly push in the charger cleaning tool as much as possible Repeat the above operations three times Perform this same operation to clean each of the other electrostatic chargers 02 _ D O al 3 Securely insert each charger cleaning tool and then close the front door Care of the Machine C350 9 5 9 1 Cleaning 6 saldeyo aUIYIB A BU JO AED C350 9 6 Utility Mode Operations Utility Mode Operation
72. O If the desired paper size is not listed touch Other Sizes to display a screen containing additional paper sizes Nua Reference For details on specifying a custom paper size refer to To set a non standard custom paper size on page 3 22 4 Touch Paper Type The Paper Type screen appears C350 3 21 o _ D O lt Basic Copy Operations Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting 5 Select the type of paper Ready to copy to be loaded Orig Copy i 6 Touch Enter To set a non standard custom paper size Non standard sized paper can be loaded into the 1st drawer or the bypass tray If non standard sized paper is loaded it will be necessary to enter the paper size The following procedure describes how to specify the size of non standard paper loaded into the 1st drawer 1 Touch Paper Size A screen appears showing the available Paper Size settings 2 Touch the key for the 1st drawer and then touch Change Size O For the bypass tray touch Bypass The Size Input screen appears 3 Touch Custom Size The Custom Size screen appears Ready to copy Size Reg istration 4 4 Make sure that X is selected 5 Touch o Touch X until the cursor moves below the digit that you wish to change and to select the length of side X for the p
73. Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings Setting the Reprint Function This function is used to specify whether or not the last job printed can be recalled and printed again The default setting is Yes a Reference For details on the memory recall feature refer to Reprint Screen on page 8 22 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 3 4 6 Touch Reprint F O Admin Set 7 Touch the key for the desired setting O Admin Set Select option for Reprint 8 Touch Enter 9 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 10 50 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 1 0 N Additional Information If the Reprint function is set to Yes Reprint OFF appears in the Basic screen For details on the Reprint OFF function refer to Blocking Document Scan Storage Reprint OFF Function on page 6 2 C350 10 51 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings Setting the HDD Lock Function This function is used to select whether or not the hard di
74. Orig Copy The Original Copy screen appears 5 To specify the Original Direction Margin or Thick Original settings touch the appropriate key x Reference For details on specifying the Original Direction Margin or Thick Original settings refer to Specifying Conditions of the Original on page 3 40 Ready to copy 6 Select the desired copy settings and then press the Start key 7 The pages of the document are fed in starting with the topmost page 8 After each page is scanned it is fed out into the document output tray 2 42 C350 2 10 Feeding the Document 9 When removing large sized documents carefully lift up the document feed tray of the reverse automatic document feeder as far as possible 10 Remove all document pages from the document output tray 11 Carefully lower the document feed tray A CAUTION Do not press on the lever at the rear of the machine gt When closing the document feed tray otherwise the document feed tray may close quickly and pinch your hand C350 2 43 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 10 Feeding the Document Placing the Document On the Original Glass Place the document directly on the original glass for it to be scanned Each page of the document must be positioned manually i e the previous one must be removed and the next one plac
75. PC drum is exposed to intense light poor image quality could result Dono unpac Dono unpack a toner unit or PC drum unit until the very time of use Do not leave an ked unit standing Install it immediately or poor image quality could result keep toner units and PC drum units in an upright position or upside down as poor image quality could result Dono Dono throw or drop a toner unit or PC drum unit as poor image quality could result use this product in an area where ammonia or other gases or chemicals are present Failure to do so may shorten the service life of the product cause damage or dec Dono specifi rease performance use this product in an environment with a temperature outside the range ed in the User s Guide as a breakdown or malfunction could result Dono attempt to feed stapled paper carbon paper or aluminum foil through this product as a malfunction or fire could result Do not to uch or scratch the surface of the toner unit developing roller and the PC drum as poor image quality could result Use the supplies and consumables recommended by the dealer Use of any supply or consumable not recommended could result in poor image quality and breakdown USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES For U S A Users NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules
76. Panel Reset Timer Function on page 10 61 e Whether or not the panel reset timer operation is performed when there is a change of users can be set with one of the User s Choice 1 functions For details refer to Setting the Account Change Auto Reset Function on page 10 15 Power Save Mode If no operation is performed for the specified length of time or if the Power Save key is pressed the touch panel goes off and the machine enters a mode where it conserves power This is the Power Save mode The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Power Save mode As the factory default the machine enters Power Save mode after 15 minutes R Additional Information The machine may enter Sleep mode from Power Save mode As the factory default the machine enters Power Save mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes and then the machine enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes have elapsed N Reference The length of time after the last operation until the machine enters Power Save mode can be specified using the Power Save function on the User s Choice 1 screen For details refer to Setting the Power Save Function on page 10 11 2 18 C350 2 3 Turning the Machine On and Off 2 Recovering From Power Save Mode 1 Press the Start key The Power Save mode can also be canceled by pressing any key on the operation panel or by touching the touch panel 2 The touch panel comes on agai
77. Settings csssesesseseeneeeeenee 3 44 Image Types cuco Ha A aS atin ey 3 44 Background Setting of Density Parameter Manual 3 45 Background Setting of Density Parameter Auto 3 45 Density Setting of Density Parameter oocconncnnncninnonnninncinnnons 3 45 Text Enhancement SettidQ oococccncnnnccnnncnnncnnncnnnccnnocnnnnncnnnnnns 3 45 Glossy SOUING e anana a a A RS 3 46 Screen Pattern Settings oocoonnccinncnnnccinncnncconercnncnnrarnnnnnnnn nano 3 46 To select a Photo Density Setting oooonnccinnnnnncnnccnncnnnccnnanncnn 3 46 To select a glossy finish Glossy setting ooonnccnnnnnnnnn 3 47 To select a Screen Pattern SettidQ ooonnocinnnnnnnnnccnninnncnnos 3 48 4 1 Paper Specifications secccsesseesseeenseeeseeeseneeeseesseeseeeesseeeeeeenees 4 2 Paper POS cios tn tasks ada 4 2 PaperSizosi ii a ga RET da 4 3 Paper Capacitan ste gt 4 4 4 2 Paper Storage ada vasa v rsties ninsew anann 4 6 4 3 Automatically Selecting the Paper Source a aaa 4 7 Operating Conditions i daaa 4 7 Order for Selecting Another Paper Drawer oooocioccnccnocccoccccncos 4 7 4 4 Special Paper aoa nes zilais eeececazsteeseeeenety 4 8 vi C350 5 1 Document FeediNQ nccicnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnncnnnernnnrnr nn cerrar cnn rra Document Feeding Methods Appropriate Document Types Using the Reverse Automatic Document Feeder ococonc
78. Track Data E K C The Volume Track Data E K C screen appears 6 Touch the key for the block containing the desired account o The 998 accounts are divided into 20 blocks with each range indicated on the keys 7 Touch LE and to specify the desired volume number o Touch 10 and 10 to increase or decrease by 10 the volume number that 1 Single 2 or 22932 Zo10r Black is selected Total o o o o 0 pense o 0 0 size o o o o 0 Duplex 0J scan od 8 Touch the key for the data that you wish to view Check the number of prints 9 Touch Enter The Volume Track Data E K C screen appears again 10 98 C350 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 1 0 N Additional Information To initialize the counters displayed in the current counter screen for the selected account touch Counter Clear After touching Counter Clear requesting confirmation to clear the counters screen appears Touch Yes and then touch Enter to initialize the displayed counters for the selected account The print limits specified in the Upper Limit Copy Print screen are not initialized In addition all Volume Track Data E K C counters for all accounts ca
79. ZB i Paper N Additional Information Normal Select this setting if plain paper is loaded This is the default setting Paper with this setting can be automatically selected with the Auto Paper Select setting and Auto Zoom setting Fine Select this setting when using high quality paper Paper with this setting is not automatically selected with the Auto Paper Select setting Single Sided Only Select this setting for paper that should not be used with double sided copying for example when one side has already been printed on Paper with this setting is not automatically selected during automatic double sided copying Special Paper Select this setting for paper other than Fine or Single Sided Only paper that should not be selected automatically Paper with this setting is not automatically selected with the Auto Paper Select setting 6 Touch the key for the desired special paper 7 Touch Enter 8 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again 10 22 C350 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 1 0 Setting the Auto select paper for small originals Function This function is used to specify whether or not small sized documents are printed if the paper size is too small and cannot be automatically detected The default settings are ON and the 1st drawer N Reminder W
80. and to specify the desired detection level 5 Touch Enter 6 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again User s Choice 2 English Preset ACS Judgement Level EEE ia AL TEE Yes Yes User s Choice 2 of the originals Std maane Set the judgement level for Auto Color Selection ACS Judgement Level Adjust Near Full Color Ra sete und 10 18 C350 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 1 0 Setting the Intelligent Sorting Function This function is used to specify if the Sort setting or the NonSort setting is selected automatically for documents loaded into the reverse automatic document feeder The default setting is Yes If this function is set to Yes loading a document into the reverse automatic document feeder and pressing the Start key automatically selects the NonSort setting if the document consists of only one page or the Sort setting if the document consists of two or more pages 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch User s Choice 2 3 Touch Intelligent Sorting 4 Touch the key for the desired setting 5 Touch Enter 6 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The
81. are fed out and stacked on top of each other as they are printed Sorting Sort Setting The copies are automatically divided into separate sets with each set containing a copy of each page Wis Additional Information The machine can be set to automatically select the Sort or Non Sort setting according to the number of pages in the document when it is loaded into the reverse automatic document feeder If the Intelligent Sorting function is set to Yes the Non Sort setting is automatically selected if the document consists of only one page and the Sort setting is automatically selected if the document consists of 2 or more pages For details refer to Setting the Intelligent Sorting Function on page 10 19 3 8 C350 3 4 Selecting Output Settings 3 Crisscross Sorting Crisscross Feeding If no finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met printed copies can be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern e Letter or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size paper is used e Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the portrait orientation in one paper drawer and with the landscape orientation in another drawer Auto Paper Select must be selected as the Paper Size setting The Mixed Original function must not be used The reverse automatic document feeder must be used The Criss Cross function on the User s Choice 2 screen must be set t
82. as loose leaf paper Coated documents such as heat sensitive or carbon backed paper Documents that are bound for example with staples or paper clips Documents that are bound in a book or booklet Documents that are bound together with glue Document pages that have been cut or contain cutouts Documents printed on paper thicker than 56 1 4 Ib Documents printed on paper thicker than 29 1 2 Ib during double sided printing Inkjet printer paper Label sheets Offset printing masters Documents that have just been printed with this machine N Reminder Before loading folded documents such as those folded in half or in three into the reverse automatic document feeder be sure to flatten the pages Appropriate Document Types Using the Original Glass Document paper type Sheets books and other three dimensional objects Maximum weight 4 1 2 lb 5 4 C350 5 1 Document Feeding 5 Document Precautions Using the Original Glass Observe the following precautions when placing the document on the original glass Handle the documents as described Standard non standard sized documents e The paper size of documents printed on A4 L C A3 L or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 L Foolscap paper cannot be automatically detected The document size cannot be detected automatically therefore the Auto Paper Select setting and the Auto Zoom setting cannot be used e Inthe Basic screen touch Paper Size and then select the app
83. at dueto Bada 13 2 Specify Conditions iii ia 3 42 slabiliZer oca aa ea d 10 78 Staple cartridge oooonnccnnnononcconccnnononnnnnnnncnrnnorcnnnnncnnn 11 11 11 12 11 15 Staple Si aos ias tots rs 11 50 11 53 Stapling A 3 10 A Pd La atlasa das as dazi 8 3 Stopping COPYINO ksi s tai gisa oh sa adi inden 3 4 Stor de ta ja ga nie ews sin Aa s ks 4 6 O d 3 23 10 5 SU pPli6 x tk Keidas added rast 11 68 15 10 C350 15 1 Index 15 Take up roller oi ta aia 9 4 Test PS cinc a a ed 7 39 Thick original cian rita 3 42 Thick paper and OHP film image density ooocococcciocccocccanccnonccanccannnono 10 69 Toner Cartridge iia dd 11 2 11 4 11 7 Tonef cov rad viii Slee 10 105 TOPS iaa a sena 10 33 TOP MAargin sch AA eee It ee te i 10 80 Top Bound double sided documents cooooccccconccccnonncnnncnonancnnnnnn conan nos 14 19 TOUCH panel stats rets ei tads da Katls t 2 21 Transmission list screen ee cceeseeeseeeeeneeeseneeeeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeenneeeeenneees 8 6 Transmission log screen ocomocccinnccononcncnnnnnnnnrennnnnecnnnnncnnnrr rra 8 10 Troubleshooting i nr det pis as rede M 12 1 EUINING Off it 2 20 TRUITT E s et a m 2 17 Unit lileindicator st zsn akn s fe 10 30 A A v jas iekas ja 11 66 Unlocking lt tkesads kaz Adrija gk 10 40 User authentication e niin das ii m s 10 43 Utility SCreen cios a a E a E aAA aapa 10 2 Volumestrack datal ici dd 10 97 Volume track functions
84. available only if the optional finisher FS 601 is installed 3 32 C350 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings 3 Single Sided Copy 1 Setting Select this setting to produce single sided copies Double Sided Copy 2 Setting Select this setting to use the automatic duplex unit to produce double sided copies With this setting paper usage can be reduced by about half R Hint Automatic double sided copying cannot be performed with paper other than plain paper Manually perform double sided copying For details on positioning the paper for manually making double sided copies refer to Loading Paper Into the 1st Drawer on page 2 26 or Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray on page 2 35 fap _ D O lt Single Sided 2in1 Copy 1 2in1 Setting Select this setting to reduce two document pages to fit one single sided copy page With this setting paper usage can be reduced by about half Basic Copy Operations R Hint The copy zoom ratio during 2in1 copying 4in1 copying and booklet binding can be specified using the 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom function on the User s Choice 2 screen For details refer to Setting the 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom Function on page 10 17 Double Sided 2in1 Copy 2 2in1 Setting Select this setting to reduce four document pages to fit one double sided copy page With this setting paper usage can be reduced
85. by about one quarter C350 3 33 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings Single Sided 4in1 Copy 1 4in1 Setting Select this setting to reduce four document pages to fit one single sided copy page With this setting paper usage can be reduced by about one quarter N Hint The copy order during 4in1 copying can be specified using the 4int Copy Order function on the User s Choice 2 screen For details refer to Setting the 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom Function on page 10 17 1 7 3 gt ZE 3 1 Example For 4 single sided document pages Double Sided 4in1 Copy 2 4in1 Setting Select this setting to reduce eight document pages to fit one double sided copy page With this setting paper usage can be reduced by about one eighth R Hint The copy order during 4in1 copying can be specified using the 4in1 Copy Order function on the User s Choice 2 screen For details refer to Setting the 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom Function on page 10 17 3 34 C350 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings 3 Booklet Copy Booklet Setting 3 Select this setting to lay out the document for booklet making and 1 ai copy it onto both sides of the paper The page order differs than dEl with the 2 2in1 setting Example For 8 single sided document pages o _ D O cC Basic Copy Operations
86. ce 10 80 Setting the PRT Area Left Margin Function 10 82 Setting the PRT Area Dup Left Margin Function 10 84 Setting the Center Staple Position Function cee 10 86 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C FUNCION iii tien ecc 10 89 Setting the Volume Track Mode E K C Function 10 89 Canceling Volume Track Mode E K Cohonionincinincconincccinncccnnos 10 91 Setting Up Volume Track E K C Accounts Volume Track Setting E K C Function 10 93 Viewing Volume Track Data E K C Counters Volume Track Data E K C Function ooooncccinnonnccccacinannos 10 97 Printing Volume Track Data E K C Counters eeee 10 100 Clearing Volume Track Data E K C Counters 008 10 102 10 12 Viewing Toner Usage Toner Coverage Function 10 105 11 1 When the Message Toner Cartridge X needs to be replaced soon AppearS ssssssssunsennnnrnunnnnnnennnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn nn 11 2 Display in Enlarge Display MOde ecesceeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeee 11 2 11 2 When the Message Replace the Toner cartridge ADDONS E EE T 11 4 Display in Enlarge Display Mode ooooconoccccnocccononcccnonaccnnoncnnnnno 11 4 Replacing the Toner Cartridge ooooonocccinccionicncccnncncornanancnannnnnos 11 7 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge ADDIS EE A E T 11 11 Display in Enlarge Display
87. distribution in Cancet Enter_l number can be set to any number between 001 and 999 Pages Color Select either First Page Only or All Pages O O If First Page Only is selected the distribution number is only printed on the first page of each copy set If All Pages is selected the distribution number is printed on all pages of each copy set Select the desired color for the distribution number Touch Enter O O O If the first distribution number is not set the distribution numbers start from 001 After the distribution number reaches 999 it returns to 000 To cancel the Set Numbering function touch Cancel in the Set Numbering screen 7 6 C350 7 3 Printing Distribution Numbers on Copies Set Numbering Function 7 8 If necessary specify any other copy settings N o E ok 99 LE 0 9 Press the Start key Application Functions C350 7 7 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 4 Making Copies for Filing File Margin Function 7 4 Making Copies for Filing File Margin Function Copies can be made with a file margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders The following binding margin positions are available Select the binding margin position suitable for the document Setting Copy Position Description document copy Copies are printed with the contents of the documen
88. document to be copied O lf Text is selected Dot Matrix Original appears 3 For documents with faint text such as that written with a pencil touch Dot Matrix Original 4 For documents consisting of text that overlaps images such as illustrations or graphs text with a background touch Text Enhancement 5 Touch 444 or e to select the desired text density level 6 Touch Enter Ready to copy hancement v Ready to copy Orig gt Copy Text Enha Photo i i PB tu Application ncement AS ens ete 3 46 C350 3 10 Selecting Photo Density Settings 3 7 When copying a document with a background color or to adjust the copy density touch Density Ready to copy The Density screen Cance1 Enter appears Darker Lighter Background o To manually specify the density of the background color touch the Lighter and Darker keys to adjust the Background setting O To automatically set the density of the background color touch Auto O To specify the density of the copy touch the Lighter and Darker keys to adjust the Density setting Lighter Density Darker coca o _ D O lt 8 Select the desired density settings 9 Touch Enter To select a glossy finish Glossy setting 1 Touch Photo Density Th
89. e cod ese 13 7 Job Separator JS 601 oo ee eeceeseecseeeseeeeeeeeeneeteaeeeaeeteeeeseeeaes 13 7 14 1 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables ccsccsseseeeereeeeeeeenes 14 2 Copy Paper SiZeS eesceseceeseceseseseeseeceseneceeseeeneneeteaeeenennerees 14 2 ZOOM OS is diisan d s aaa as Bada aid ss gas 14 3 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications aaa 14 6 Description of the Table eee ae 14 6 Single Sided DOCUMENTS ooooccccccccoconoccnonnncnncconnnnanc nano ncnncanncnnns 14 7 Left Bound Double Sided Document coooonocccocccoccciocccancconncons 14 13 Top Bound Double Sided Documents 14 19 14 3 Function Combination Table ccssscccssseecssseeeessseersseeees 14 25 Function Combination Table ooconccccinncccnnoccccoccnononnncnnnnnnnnnns 14 25 E O AAA oS MR oS SE ae SS Sen nee ae 15 2 C350 xiii Making Basic Copies Making Basic Copies The procedure for making basic copies is described below Job b 11 25 Ready to copy User a Jo 7 GS GP SEE eee Name Paper Size 1 Load the document to be copied S Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 xiv C350 Ma
90. eeeesceeesseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeaeeresneeeeeeneeees 11 7 Replacing units arimara uaa gee a tattle senha 11 66 Reprise 6 2 Reprint recalll axis 10 50 Reprint sereen Variada a adele ee 8 22 Reservation vicio cai in dec deceit 3 18 3 25 Re ei mode cetonas 10 4 Restarting COpyING sien audacia a a 3 4 Reverse automatic document feeder occcoocccnnoccccnonnnonancnonananonannnnns 11 37 Reverse automatic document feeder DF 601 asenne 13 4 C350 Chapter 15 Index Chapter 15 Index 1 B 15 1 Index Ri ht side door nisin tk ee ia 11 29 Sample copies pri kansia kn an a Ati da Ss 6 6 Saturation sek kai tee Seth Rs eds 7 29 SCAN TO MEMO coa 7 2 SCANNING esi zi ts id iban 7 3 Screen pattem it dae retas eed 3 48 Separate Scan cintia A S saka 7 3 SNAMPNCSS tlie snes i Ato ede dt ta 7 30 Single Color utili ia 3 5 Single sided 2in1 COPY oooooccccccccnocononanonononononnconnnnrnnnnnnn aa 3 33 Single sided 4in1 COPY coooooococccccccccnonacancconcncnnncnncn aa 3 34 Single Sided COPY cdi rra 3 33 Single sided documents ii 14 7 Single sided original ia d ma 3 27 SIGS Pes eM e ag di 10 13 Sleep Mode A sa aa ra t das d 2 19 Small sized documents a aaa 5 5 10 23 SO ee ay Ce ee eit die ee te 3 5 SOM z ihadus iG aie Ae a 3 8 Space reguirements oo aaae raa eaaa a p aE E AE e aaa haai 1 8 E a a 4 8 Specific applications 20 eeeeeeseceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeseeeseesseeneneeeas 14 6 Specifications a
91. ele SiS ie ale sg 5 5 5 s o l s es 8 g lt 18 3 E gt 13 213 2 3 18 lt lz 15 la 2 ojo E Z z 3 32 3 9 2 amp s 2 e l e 3 s Z Z El 3 8 3 518 l 8 18 8 8 8 2 8 8 6 le E 6 2 E 8 2 8 8 8 IB l z 3 a l 8 S 8 8 8 Z 1511 peyejes Bulnes S 5 5 S 8 3 8 8 5 8 8 8 6 3 8 3 8 8 5 8 3 R 2 IR JR IR 8 2 E R R 8 5 8 8 3 8 8 5 3 3 8 5 8 8 8 8 8 5 8 va ele xipuoddy C350 14 30 14 3 Function Combination Table 1 4 Function combination code keys O The functions can be combined WV The functions cannot be combined The function set last has priority A The functions cannot be combined The function set first has priority A warning message will appear V The functions cannot be combined The function set first has priority No warning message will appear or other functions will not be available after the first function is selected The functions cannot be combined The functions can be combined only when the document is placed on the original glass A warning message will appear O If paper is loaded through the bypass tray a warning message appears indicating that the fun
92. gt b b b b b DD DDD D gt D D o o b 8 e101s epow O o ojo ojojo jo jo ojojo jojojo jo o jojojo ojojojo ojojo jojojo ja jo o jojo o jojojo oj ojoj gt I Oo o o b S Buuejueo O o ojo ojojo jo jo jojojo jojojo jo ojojo jo ojojojo ojojo jojojojojo o jojo ojojojo o ojoj gt ojojojo 5 Ado9 e dues OL P O b P P DD P O D D JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O i Ii ojo b 8 iseguoo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofojojojojojojojojojo jojojo b o i 1I ojo o o 8 Ausueq doo ojojojojojojojojojojojofofjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo P OJOJOJOJO O b o i 1i o o ojo E B eouejeg 10109 ojojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo lt jojojojojojojojojojofojo O o b o ji Ii o ojo o 5 5 sseudieus ojojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo O o oj b o i 1ijojo o o E e sseuuova ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJjojojojo O O O P O I 1 OJOJO O 2 8 Jronames ojojojojojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojoafjojo afojojojojojojojojo O o o o joj b o i 1i o jo jo o 5 enH O O OJO O O O JO JOJOJOJO OJO O JO JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJd4 OJO d4 OJOJOJO JPJOJOJO ojojojojojojpjo 1 jojojojo 8 8 luca ojojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojo lt fojo ajojojojojo ojojojojoj
93. guide FN6 open pull out any misfed paper 16 Slide the finisher back against the machine C350 11 45 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears Clearing a Paper Misfeed in Finisher FS 601 N Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine ms es 2 Open the horizontal transport unit cover 3 Remove any misfed paper and then close the cover of the horizontal transport unit 11 46 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 1 1 4 Open the front door of the finisher 5 Turn misfeed clearing dial O clockwise until the removal Removal indicator indicator is completely blue N Hint If the dial is turned too far turn it counterclockwise to adjust it N Reminder Ifthe message Misfeed detected appears be sure to perform these steps Ifthe paper is pulled out with too much force without performing these steps the finisher may be damaged C350 11 47 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 6 Open the upper door of the finisher and then pull out any paper in the feed sectio
94. job 5 Destination Indicates the tray where the printed pages will be fed out 6 File name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer 7 Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 8 Copy Displays the specified number of pages to be printed With jobs listed as Printing the number of pages remaining to be printed is counted down 9 Job start Displays the time that the job was queued 10 Job end Displays the time when printing of the job is expected to be finished C350 8 15 o _ 7 2 O lt Managing Jobs Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 8 3 Job Control Screens To increase the print priority of a job 1 Select the job that you wish to prioritize 2 Touch OK If the job currently being printed can be interrupted printing is interrupted and the job given priority is printed Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job that printing was interrupted for is finished If the job currently being printed cannot be interrupted a job has already been interrupted or a prioritized job is being printed printing is interrupted after printing for the current job is finished 8 16 C350 8 3 Job Control Screens 8 Combine Jobs Screen To view a list of jobs stored in the memory touch Combine Jobs Two to five stored jobs can be selected and combined into one job R Additional Information
95. key Press to erase a value such as the number of copies a zoom ratio or a size entered using the keypad 12 Stop key Press the Stop key during copying to stop the copy operation 13 Start key e Press to start copying When this machine is ready to begin copying the indicator on the Start key lights up in green If the indicator on the Start key lights up in orange copying cannot begin e Press to restart a stopped job For details on jobs refer to Overview of Jobs on page 8 2 14 Contrast dial Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel 15 Enlarge Display key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode 16 Accessibility key Press to display the screen for specifying user accessibility functions 17 Mode Check key Press to display screens showing the specified settings C350 2 13 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions Touch Panel Status 295 Print 1 eem n wa ng Print waiting Print Waiting Print Waiting Print ACTIVE ACtiVe Ode Print S Delete Masse res Pos Es 1 Message display Density Application 3 Settings display 2 Functions Mode setting displa 5 Job Log screen aa
96. margin is adjusted to between 4 5 mm and 5 5 mm O lfmore adjustment is necessary return to step 10 and repeat the adjustment procedure 14 Touch Enter 15 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again C350 10 81 o bs _ 5 2 O lt Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions Setting the PRT Area Left Margin Function This function is used to adjust the printing position at the left edge of the paper in comparison to the paper feed direction The left margin of the print area can be adjusted for each paper drawer R Condition The left margin of the print area is adjusted during manufacturing of the machine Normally the left margin will not need to be adjusted The procedure with 11 x 17 size paper loaded into the 1st drawer is described below 1 Load 11 x 17 size paper into the 1st drawer 2 Press the Utility key 3 Touch Admin Mode 4 Using the keypad type in the administrator code O Touch Enter al Touch Expert User Mode 6 Touch PRT Area Left Margin i we Expert User Mode pre Thick Paper and OnP Film De Color Pitt Correctiol Color Shift 3 center ogtaple Correction lt Bk gt E Positio 10 82 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode F
97. number of pages remaining to be printed is counted down 8 Job start Displays the time that the job was queued 9 Job end Displays the time when printing of the job is expected to be finished To reprint a job saved in the memory 1 Touch the job in the memory that you wish to reprint O To print multiple jobs continue selecting all desired jobs 2 Touch OK C350 8 23 Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 3 Job Control Screens 8 24 C350 Care of the Machine Care of the Machine Chapter 9 Chapter 9 Care of the Machine 9 9 1 Cleaning 9 1 Cleaning A Reminder Turn off the machine set the power switch to O before cleaning it Housing Clean the surface of the housing by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent Original Glass Clean the original glass by wiping it with a soft dry cloth 9 2 C350 9 1 Cleaning 9 Control Panel Clean the control panel by wiping it with a soft dry cloth N Reminder Pressing too hard on the control panel or the touch panel may damage them Never use a mild household detergent or glass cleaner to clean the control panel or touch panel Chapter 9 Document Transfer Belt 1 Clean the document transfer belt by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent Care of the Machine R
98. o o o o o o o o o o o o o o E 3 5 El 2 El 3 E 5 3 S kl E ll E 2 3 3 5 E a g a ES a E 15 Thick paper 1 double sided 17 Thick paper 2 double sided 18 Thick paper 3 19 Thick paper 3 double sided 10 Paper Feed Cabinet 16 Thick paper 2 11 Multiple bypass tray 22 High Quality Paper 23 Specialty 24 Single Sided Only 25 Auto Zoom 26 Full Size 27 Reduco Enlarge 14 Thick paper 1 28 Manual Zoom 29 Manual input 21 Envelopes 30 X Y Zoom 31 Density level 32 Auto Background density 38 Background level 38 Printed Image 39 Copied Paper 37 Photo Paper 35 Text amp Photo 40 Text Enhancement 41 Dot Matrix Original 42 Glossy Mode 45 Book Copy Separation 46 Book Copy Spread 47 Original Direction 44 Double sided original 48 Margin 43 Single sided original t Jajdeyo xipuaddy C350 14 26 14 14 3 Function Combination Table vi Jejdeyo xipuaddy 8 fies Adog ojojojojojojojojojojo lt afojojojojojojojojojoJojojojojojojoj
99. o pjo 1 jojojojoO S ong ojojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojo ajojo ajojojojojo ojojojojoj jojp gt jo I 1 fojojojo 5 peu ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj lt ajojoj lt ajojojojojo gt ojojojojoj joj joji ijojojojo 8 Juentog ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ajojofafojojojo ojojoj jojojojojojoj IO ifofojojo R fidnuayu rpepapepeprpr ETE pepe pra frpa pipi pr gafa piprprpa pipi pi Japrpriprpigrjarfipripripifrjapifijojijo ye Ig ER Jueos eyeredos ojojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojo lt jajojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojoj gt jo 1 1 fojojojo ESIR teubuo poxw Ol lt lt lt lt lt a lt alalolololololololo afolololojojojojojojo Joljolololojololojolofololole loli 1 lojojole yoe3 uonesedes 10109 O P P Th hh P POP P P TJOJO d OP Id jajajajajaj ojoj lt afojojojojojojojojojojoj gt fo 1 1 ajojojo lojra uonesedos 10109 ol lo lt lofo lt afof lt a lt f lt al lt l lt l lt o o a o o o o gt o i 1 lt fofofo El Jesueney sod Bon ojojojojojojojojojofojojojojojojojojoj ojojojojo lt ajojo lt iofjojojojojoljojoJojojo pP jo 1 Jojojojo R 1009 punoif peg ojojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojoj jojojo o lt pafjojo lt jojojojojojojojojojojo p jo 1 jojojojo e R f10109 ejbuis ojojojojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojoj jojojo P O d4 4 O O lt P
100. order 3 User name Displays the type source of the job COPIER is displayed for copy jobs 4 Status Displays the status of the job 5 Destination Indicates the tray where the printed pages will be fed out 6 File name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer 7 Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 8 Copy Displays the specified number of pages to be printed With jobs listed as Printing the number of pages remaining to be printed is counted down 9 Job start Displays the time that the job was gueued 8 18 C350 8 3 Job Control Screens 8 To combine jobs 1 Select the first job that you wish to combine with other jobs 2 Select another job that you wish to combine with the first job selected foe o To combine more than two jobs continue selecting all desired jobs 2 O Up to five jobs can be selected S o To change any of the copy settings touch Change Mode and then change WS the settings n 3 Touch OK 2 2 HDD Screen 2 D c N S Nas Condition The HDD screen is only available if the hard disk is installed Touch HDD The HDD screen containing a list of jobs stored on the hard disk appears Jobs stored on the hard disk can be printed Nos Additional Information If accounts have been specified from the Utility mode the screen for entering the account access code appears after HDD is touched Using the keypad type in the 8 d
101. prohibit transferring to Sleep Mode when b in Held or Locked Jobs queue Enter User s Choice Erin 154240 yRensterr ang to_Sleep when ob n Held Locked Jobs queue For details on the Disable Sleep Mode function refer to Setting the Disable Sleep Mode Function on page 10 34 10 14 C350 10 4 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 1 Functions 10 Setting the Account Chan ge Auto Reset Function This function is used to specify whether or not this machine clears all settings when it detects that the user has changed for example when the optional key counter has been removed or when the screen for entering the account number and administrator code appears The default setting is Yes N Reference For more details refer to Turning the Machine On and Off on page 2 17 1 Press the Utility key Touch Users Choice 1 Touch 2 2 A O N Touch Account Change Auto Reset 5 Touch the key for the desired setting 6 Touch Enter 7 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again User s Choice 1 Account Change AUto Reset User s Cho
102. replace Imaging Unit Open the Front door and follow the Replacing Instruction ALTA 11 68 C350 11 10 When the Message Please replace XXXX Appears 11 Touch to display the message shown in the following illustration Please replace Imaging Unit Open the Front door and follow the Replacing Instruction Col y N Hint When the message appears replace the specified supplies or part according to your maintenance agreement A CAUTION Used supplies or part gt Do not throw away used supplies or parts Instead keep them in their boxes to be collected by your service representative C350 11 69 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 11 11 11 Main Messages and Their Remedies 11 11 Main Messages and Their Remedies Message Cause Remedy Original left on Glass The document was left on the original glass Remove the document from the original glass Matching paper size is not available Reselect the paper size Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in a paper drawer Either select a different copy size or manually feed paper of a suitable size Original size cannot be detected Reselect the paper size O The document is not positioned correctly O A document with a non standard size or with a size too
103. screen touch Basic Job deleted by user The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 User name Displays the type source of the job COPIER is displayed for copy jobs 4 Destination Indicates the tray where the printed pages were fed out 5 File name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer 6 Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 7 Copy Displays the specified number of pages to be printed With jobs listed as Printing the number of pages remaining to be printed is counted down 8 Job start Displays the time that the job was queued 8 8 C350 8 2 Job Log Screens No ltem Name Description 9 Job end Displays the time when printing of the job is expected to be finished 10 Result Displays the job process details 11 Job status Displays details of any errors that may have occurred while the job was being performed C350 8 9 o _ 5 2 O lt Managing Jobs Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 8 2 Job Log Screens Scan Log Screen Touch Scan Log The Scan Log screen containing the list of transmitted jobs
104. selected C350 14 31 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 3 Function Combination Table Then select a Photo Density setting where the Text Enhancement setting has no effect on such as with the Photo Paper setting Next select a Photo Density setting where the Text Enhancement setting can be specified such as with the Text setting 34 or the Map setting 36 The previously specified Text Enhancement setting of 3 Darker is maintained The Centering function from the Utility mode can be set but will not be applied Possible only with paper sizes of Letter L and A4 L 1 Although the settings can be selected at the same time they cannot technically be combined Number of First Number of Next Description Setting Setting 1 60 61 Number of copies If the Non Sort setting and a stapling setting are set and the 60 61 1 entered number of copies exceeds the number allowed with the stapling setting a message warning that the number of copies for stapling has been exceeded If the warning is ignored and the job is started the stapling setting is canceled 4 84 85 88 Auto Color Color setting The functions cannot be combined with the Auto Color setting 84 85 88 4 However if the Auto Color setting determines that the Black Color setting should be used prin
105. shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessible as the power plug may be difficult to pull out when an emergency occurs e Always use this product in a well ventilated location Operating the product in a poorly ventilated room for an extended period of time could injure your health Ventilate the room at regular intervals e Whenever moving this product be sure to disconnect the power cord and other cables Failure to do this could damage the cord or cable resulting in a fire electrical shock or breakdown e When moving this product always hold it by the locations specified in the User s Guide or other documents If the unit falls it may cause severe personal injury The product may also be damaged or malfunction Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a year and clean the area between the plug terminals Dust that accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire When unplugging the power cord be sure to hold onto the plug Pulling on the power cord could damage the cord resulting in a fire or electrical shock C350 1 1 For Safe Use Precautions for Routine Use e Do not store toner units PC drum units and other supplies and consumables in a place subject to direct sunlight and high temperature and humidity as poor image quality and malfunction could result e Donotattempt to replace the toner unit and PC drum unit in a place exposed to direct sunlight If the
106. step 14 O If more adjustment is necessary return to step 8 and repeat the adjustment procedure 14 Touch Enter The Expert User Mode screen appears again 15 Touch Color Shift Correction M Repeat the procedure for adjusting the cyan shift steps 6 to 13 to adjust the magenta shift 16 Touch Color Shift Correction Y and repeat the same procedure for the yellow shift 17 Touch Enter The Expert User Mode screen appears again 18 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 10 76 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 10 Setting the Black Image Density Correction Function This function is used to adjust the density of the printed image in black and white copies The default setting is the standard setting middle setting 1 2 Press the Utility key Touch Admin Mode Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter Touch Expert User Mode Touch Black Image Density Correction abi to adjust the image density Touch Enter Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again Expert User Mode hick Paper and pe Film Image Densit S10 Shire 7 Correction gt q armar Shire c Correctio PRT Area Mar q MOTA S PR H Correction Y Color Shift Correction lt B
107. the sample copy The Sample Copy can be made even if the edges of the Ready to copy 0 1 2 Sample area document extend off the original glass 4 Press the Start key The copy job is queued for printing and Sample Copies are printed The parameter screen appears again C350 7 39 N _ gt EL oO E Application Functions Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions The Creation functions can be used to easily apply special effects to the copies R Reference Samples for the Creation functions can be seen in the Creative Image Book The following Creation functions are available To make settings for the Background Color function This function allows you to copy a document using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background blank areas 1 Position the document s to be copied S Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Application and then touch Creation 3 Inthe Creation screen touch Background Color Ready to copy aware olor mage di stment 4 E Booklet Creation a oto H PBe gitu Enter Multi Page i Enlar 4 Mirror Postcard
108. thick copying paper 3 Envelope Envelopes OHP Overhead projector transparencies N Hint Envelope OHP N Plain Thick3 Thick3 E Thick2 2 Plain 2 Thickt Thickt N Thick2 2 To print on the back side of previously printed plain paper or thick paper using manual double sided copying set the media type selection dial to the setting appropriate for the paper type when copying onto the second side N Reference For details on paper types refer to Paper Specifications on page 4 2 2 30 C350 2 7 Loading Paper Into the 2nd 3rd or 4th Drawer 2 7 Loading Paper Into the 2nd 3rd or 4th Drawer 1 Pull out the paper drawer 2 Press down on the paper lifting plate until it locks into place Reminder Be careful not to touch the film 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded Paper lifting plate Lateral guide C350 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 7 Loading Paper Into the 2nd 3rd or 4th Drawer 4 Load the paper into the drawer so that the side of the paper to be printed on the side facing up when the package was unwrapped faces up A Reminder If the paper is curled flatten it before loading it Do not load so many pages that the top of the stack is higher t
109. to be loaded S Hint For paper of a non standard size first load the paper and then adjust the lateral guides to the size of the loaded paper 2 26 C350 2 6 Loading Paper Into the 1st Drawer 4 For Over Size Paper adjust the trailing edge guides as shown in the illustration 5 Load the paper into the drawer so that the side of the paper to be printed on the side facing up when the package was unwrapped faces up N Reminder If the paper is curled flatten it before loading it Do not load so many pages that the top of the stack is higher than the y mark Trailing edge Trailing edge No more than 20 sheets of paper other than plain paper can be loaded C350 2 27 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 6 Loading Paper Into the 1st Drawer 8 Reminder Before loading envelopes press them down to make sure that all air is removed and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may occur When loading envelopes load them with the flap side down as shown in the illustration If the envelopes are loaded with the flap side up a paper misfeed may occur The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on 8 Reminder When loading overhead projector transparencies
110. to enter Store the name of the Delete prodam O To delete a copy program Touch Delete in the Mode Store screen and then touch the number of the program that you wish to delete When the number of the program is selected the program is deleted o To check the specified settings for a program Touch Check in the Mode Store screen and then touch the number of the program that you wish to check The specified copy settings are displayed To display additional screens of settings touch Next and Previous To return to the Mode Store screen touch Exit C350 10 5 o T _ o 2 o r Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 2 Programming Recalling Copy Programs 6 Using the character keys type in the program name and Using the 10 Keypad and Keyboard then touch Enter input the Program Name Utility O The program name can contain a maximum of 9 characters o To enter uppercase letters touch CAPS O To delete characters that have been entered touch Del 7 Touch Enter and then touch Enter in the Store screen 8 Touch Exit The Basic screen appears again 10 6 C350 10 2 Programming Recalling Copy Programs 1 0 Recalling a Copy Program The stored copy programs can be recalled to be used again as necessary 1 Load the document into the reverse autom
111. touch Enter Select the copy image size Density pplication Enter C350 7 47 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 10 For final image sizes in metric measurements touch Metric O Select the desired image size and then touch Enter Select the copy image size Density ication 11 For a non standard image size touch Custom Size o Touch X and Y and touch Z and to select the size of the final image and then touch Enter Input the copy image size pplication 12 If necessary specify any other copy settings 13 Press the Start key This concludes the setting of the final image size for the Multi Page Enlargement function 7 48 C350 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 14 Touch Zoom Divide the image Of ori Parts and expand each o inal into them pplication aro rr eances Enter J Original Size Finish 17x22 Auto Detect 15 Using the keypad type in the desired zoom ratio and then touch Enter Zoom Ratio KS Enter J x1 000 4 000 16 If necessary specify any other copy settings 17 Press the Start key This concludes the setting of the copy enlargement ratio for the Multi Page Enlargement func
112. type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Expert User Mode 5 Touch Center Staple Position we Expert User Mode hick Paper and pe Film Image Densit Color Shi ft Correct iol C rr RIEU i Correctio E itt To EEE ee q E Correction Y H Genter quartic Posi olor BIF 3 Correction lt Bk gt dE 10 86 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 1 0 6 Compare the width of the left pages of the o m copy sample with the Adjust Center Staple Position or Fold Position width of the right pages PEINE to check for the center of the paper Expert User Mode 7 Ifthe staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper touch to specify the desired positive adjustment between 1 mm and 7 mm o G _ 5 2 O lt 8 Ifthe staple position is too far to the right of the center of the Utility Mode Operations between 1 mm and 7 mm 9 Touch Fold Position C350 10 87 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 10 If the fold position is shifted to the left touch to specify the desired positive adjustment between 1 mm and 7 mm 11 Ifthe fold position is shifte
113. u 8 s 813 l e alga js s a 3 3 SIS lz a SlelsiNl le cla i E E A M 8 5 2 SlelzlSlels t 2 s S8 8 8 4 a 8 2 8 8 S lo 3 5 3 gt 2 le 8 8 3 lt s 5 2 2 2 8 fo 5 SIE 8 ls 3 ls ls lg ls ls le a 92 lz le le Sle lz lel Sle Sie cS 8 3 Is Sele 4 ele 2 3 8 5 ele 2 2 E 3 E i 2 E S 5 2 2 2 e E E JE E JE E 5 5 2 5615 2 3 le S S S J8 5 8 48 I 8 8 5 5 8 3 5 S Tarps pepo fete te ote T 11 Te Te Te TE 1 T eo Te Te 1 Te Te Te TS Te Te Te Te Te 12 2 TST Te fe dele a Te Te 121818 18 isu payoejes Bumeg SEIS E 2 1212 1213 13 IN 8 3 8 8 IS 82 8 8 6 1S 8 3 13 S 5 8 8 S 5 Y IS 3 Y S S 8 14 27 C350 14 3 Function Combination Table 14 3 wooz AX ojojafaja lt ajajajajojojojojojojojojojojo lt afjafojojolojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojpjo 1 I1jofofjojo Q findur renueyy ojojojojoljojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo lt lt jafojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojofo JO 1 Jofjojojo E 8 _ wooz enuew ojojojojojojojojojojoJojojojoJoOJoOJoJojoO lt afafjojojolojojojoJoOJoOJoJoJoOJOJoJoJoJoOJoOjo PJ
114. zoom ratio For details refer to Automatic Paper Selection Auto Paper Select Setting on page 3 18 Reserving bypass tray copying If paper of the appropriate size is not loaded into the bypass tray copying can begin with the previously scanned document after the appropriate paper is loaded into the bypass tray For details refer to Bypass Reserve Settings for Bypass Tray on page 3 18 Copying book documents When copying documents such as books copies can be printed with the area along the binding or around the text erased For details refer to Books Book Copy Settings on page 3 27 xviii C350 Available Features Separately copying the pages of a page spread The two pages of a page spread such as an open book can be copied onto separate pages For details refer to Books Book Copy Settings on page 3 27 Copying multiple document pages onto a single page Multiple pages of the document can be printed together on a single copy For details refer to Selecting Copy Settings on page 3 32 Copying with a layout for center binding Copies can be made with the pages arranged for binding at the center For details refer to Booklet Copy Booklet Setting on page 3 35 Mim Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the document For details refer to Select
115. 0 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters 7 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Color Balance Ready to copy N 0 ok oO C OrigrCopy Belig tu pplication Color Image Adjustment Application Functions 3 Touch the key for the color that you wish to adjust and then touch and to specify the desired setting 4 Touch Enter o To cancel the Color Balance function touch Cancel in the Color Balance screen C350 7 35 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters To adjust the Portrait parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the tint of flesh tones 1 Touch Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Portrait 3 Touch tt and rre to select the desired setting and then touch Enter o To cancel the Portrait function touch Cancel in the Portrait screen N Additional Information Ready to copy pplication Creation Density Ready to copy Orig gt Copy Portrait Photo Density tancer enter A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with
116. 1 7 POW f SOUTC sa axis great tasi kg 1 7 Space Requirements ccecceesseseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeseeesaeenseeeeaees 1 8 1 3 Operation Precautions a aaraa msie 1 9 Operating Environmenht aas asas 1 9 Proper USE iii crn a ip 1 9 Transporting the Machine ce eeseeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeteeeeeeneeersanees 1 10 Care of Machine Supplies oooonnccinncnnncccccccnocinncncnnccnnrnnncccnnnnnn 1 10 Storage Of COpi8S oooooocccoccconoconccnnononancnnnnnnnn aa 1 11 2 1 Components and Their FunctiONS oomoccconnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnarenaenenns 2 2 2 2 Part Names and Their FunctiONS ccccconnnnnnconincnnancncncnncncnnnnonona 25 Outside of Machine cccccccccccccccninininnnnnanananononoonnnnonnnnnnnnnnanos 2 5 OPIO S curtir 2 8 Inside of MAChiN ccccconononncccnnnnnncconccnonnnccnnnnnnnnnonononnnanerenennnnnos 2 11 Control Panel cccccccscsscsccccecccececeececeesesesesesesssnsaeaeeeeneeeeeeeens 2 12 Touch Panel aaa asis ieee htt a E 2 14 Operating the Touch Panel cccccesceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeen 2 15 Supplies and Parts aaa 2 16 C350 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 3 1 3 2 3 3 Turning the Machine On and Off aaraa 2 17 Turning On the Machine oocococcincccicccnonacanccnnncnannnnncnnnnnn nana narcos 2 17 When the Machine Is Turned On ooococcnnccccoccnancnancnonananancnancn no 2 17 Queuing a Job During Warm UP coocnccnnconnconnccnncccnorn
117. 18 L Secondary paper output tray Executive L C Letter L C Legal L 11 X 17 L 12 1 4 X 18 L Paper capacity Primary paper output tray Plain paper 16 to 24 Ib 250 sheets Thick paper 1 2 3 24 1 4 to 68 lb Overhead projector transparencies envelopes label sheets and postcards 20 sheets Secondary paper output tray Plain paper 21 1 4 lb 1 000 sheets of Letter L size paper or smaller or 500 sheets of Legal L size paper or larger Staple setting Paper sizes no of bound pages Executive L C Letter L C Legal L 11 X 17 L 2 to 30 sheets Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 63 W Dimensions 21 1 4 width X 25 depth X 38 1 2 height Weight About 84 lb including the horizontal transport unit Consumables 1 staple cartridge 3 000 staples for stapling 30 sheets Job Separator JS 601 Specifications Output tray Job separator Paper types Plain paper 16 to 24 Ib Paper sizes 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L Executive L C Letter L C Legal L 11x17L Paper capacity Letter C 100 sheets Other than Letter C 50 sheets Dimensions 13 1 2 width X 20 3 4 depth X 5 3 4 height Weight 3 3 4 Ib C350 13 7 13 1 Specifications C9 gt nl E Jardeyo suoneooads C350 13 8 Appendix Appendix MOE a Chapter 14 Appendix 1 4 14 1 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables 14 1 Paper Size and Zoom R
118. 2 x lt Document Size C L L 8 1 2 C 8 1 2L 11x17L O O Letter C O O Ledger L O O O O O Letter L O O O O O 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 C O O O 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 L O O Possible Not possible 13 4 C350 13 1 Specifications 13 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 101 Specifications Paper types Plain paper 16 to 24 Ib Paper sizes 11 X 17 L to 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L Paper capacity 500 sheets 21 1 4 Ib Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 15 W Dimensions 22 1 2 width X 21 1 2 depth X 10 1 4 height Weight 48 1 2 lb Paper Feed Cabinet PC 201 Specifications Paper types Plain paper 16 to 24 lb Paper sizes 11 X 17 L to 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L Paper capacity 500 sheets 21 1 4 Ib X 2 Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 15 W Dimensions 22 1 2 width X 21 1 2 depth X 10 1 4 height Weight 57 lb Paper Feed Cabinet PC 401 Specifications Paper types Plain paper 16 to 24 Ib Paper sizes Letter C Paper capacity 2 500 sheets 21 1 4 Ib Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 45 W Dimensions 22 1 2 width X 21 1 2 depth X 10 1 4 height Weight 57 lb C350 13 5 Chapter 13 Specifications Chapter 13 Specifications 13 13 1 Specifications Finisher FS 601 Specifica
119. 5 11 26 11 28 11 29 11 33 11 37 11 41 Paper Setting toma RRA 3 18 Paper Sizes iia 4 3 14 2 Paper source ciutat 4 7 Paper storage eiii 4 6 Paper take up roller Arranon a aaia 9 4 Paper type select 4 213 jaks ie a a ene 10 21 Paper types viii 4 2 Pat Names cid neds Ald ie ss 2 5 15 8 C350 15 1 Index 15 Password voii a e e E Photo Density settings oooonocniccnniconccnnccnocnnccnnnrccnrcinnrncnnncnnn E A e6tigi dete date Ao a tee el ae ie a agen Postcard iu dene en bile AeA el A eee Power s v t 4 1 scale ee i jas aaa ai taja ira trans Power gaVe MOE a i bai u esse sat is alas Power sOur lt sist Arii ltda Prefix Suffix registration Print f t sk saakaas deed net Print log SCS ii Print quals idas Priority JEVI E irtetea dekas a a 10 29 Priority output tray iii 10 27 PRT area DUP Left Margin oooooncnnnncnnnninncnnnccnncnncccnarnrarnnnnnnnnnns 10 84 PRT area Left Margin ceeceeceeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeesaaes 10 82 PRTarea Top MargiW ciar di 10 80 Punch kit PK 501 iia dra 11 59 P nch s fap and add id da 11 59 A dan DA anas ii iii dt an is 7 31 R d cial adi 3 13 Relative lUMINOSItY innin oie 3 6 Replacihd ocaso 11 4 11 7 11 12 11 15 11 66 11 68 Replacing the staple cartridge for FS 501 oe eeeeeeesteeeneeeeeeeaees 11 12 Replacing the staple cartridge for FS 601 oo eeeeeesteeeneeeeeeeees 11 15 Replacing the toner cartridge ee
120. 501 and the expanded memory unit the Set Numbering function can be used Referred to as the hard disk throughout the manual Printer controller Internal printer controller that allows the machine to be used as both a color printer and a color scanner configured into a computer network For more details refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide C350 2 3 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 1 Components and Their Functions No Part Name Description 15 Local Interface Kit EK 501 Used for making a parallel connection between this machine optional and the computer 16 Image Controller External image controller that allows the machine to be used IC 401 optional as both a color printer and a color scanner configured into a computer network For details refer to the manual for the image controller 17 Video Interface Kit VI 501 Used for connecting the image controller IC 401 to this optional machine 18 Dehumidifier Heater 1C Installed in the paper feed cabinet or desk to prevent humidity optional from collecting in the paper Parts marked with an asterisk are internal options and therefore are not shown in the illustration Precautions for using the finisher When moving the finisher do not grab the paper output tray 2 4 C350 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions 2 2 2 Part Names and The
121. 7 gt Staple 1 jum 4 5 2 page 6 HART Corner 3 Staple NE 1 Turn 5 2 ie 6 Hole Punch Original Direction 21 Tum 5 2 Staples Lengthwise 22 tne 6 PET S Hole 3 Punch 4 2 Staples 0 6 Turn 5 2 page 6 C350 14 23 Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications gt 2 HE Top Bound Double Sided Document Double 4in1 Copy page Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner 7 gt Y Staple 12 Turn dl 9 10 p 34 7 8 1112 iF Corner 38 Staple 78 7 gt 12 tum 9 10 sajne 1112 Hole 4 gt 56 oa Punch Original Direction ji 78 2 Staples Crosswise 18 4 page LE gt Hole DG Punch 5 78 2 Staples 12 Tum 9 10 3 4 age 1112 Corner Staple ra A 9 10 3 4 he 11 12 page 5 6 Corner 7 8 Staple 432190 3 4 Hun tt 12 page Hole Punch Original Direction p1 2 5 6 9 70 2Staples Lengthwise P3 4 ppm 8 at 12 page 5 6 Hole 7 8 Punch Falls 1 2 Staples 3 4 mt 12 14 24 C350 14 3
122. Basic screen appears again User s Choice 2 English Preset Ad ustmenu Level E as Intelligent Sorting Yes Criss Cross Yes User s Choice 2 Set to automatically choose output tray based on number of print or copy jobs Intelligent Sorting C350 10 19 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions Setting the Criss Cross Function This function is used to set whether or not copies will be sorted in a crisscross pattern if the necessary conditions are met while using the Sort setting The default setting is Yes N Reference For details on crisscross sorting refer to Crisscross Sorting Crisscross Feeding on page 3 9 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch User s Choice 2 3 Touch Criss Cross 4 Touch the key for the desired setting 5 Touch Enter 6 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again User s Choice 2 anguage Select English i a C Booklet O zoom Preset AES a Lever djustment 4 Dis Intelligent Sorting C
123. Carefully pull out any misfed paper 3 Close the right side door 4 Pull out the paper drawer and then remove any misfed paper N Reminder Be careful not to touch the film 5 Close the paper drawer C350 11 27 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Large Capacity Paper Feed Cabinet au Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Pull the lever and then open the right side door of the large capacity paper feed cabinet 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper 3 Close the right side door of the large capacity paper feed cabinet 4 Press the drawer release button pull out the paper drawer of the large capacity paper feed cabinet and then remove any misfed paper S Reminder Be careful not to touch the film 5 Close the paper drawer of the large capacity paper feed cabinet 11 28 C950 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 11 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Right Side Door R Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Pull out the paper drawer being used and then remove any paper remaining in the drawer 2 Load the p
124. Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 6 Viewing Part Maintenance Levels Unit Life Indicator Function 10 6 Viewing Part Maintenance Levels Unit Life Indicator Function The usage level for the various supplies and parts can be checked 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Unit Life Indicator Graphs showing the maintenance levels for the various parts and supplies are displayed x Additional Information To print the list of maintenance levels touch Print and then press the Start key The list of maintenance levels is printed in English When printing the list be sure that Letter L paper is loaded into the 1st drawer After the list is printed touch Cancel to display the Utility screen Utility Unit Life Indicator Imaging Unit FL JE M FT JE mort JE Bk F _ JE Paper Dust Remover ozone Filter FL JE Fusing Unit F Image Transfer Roller unit F gnage Transfer Belt Unit 3 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again 10 30 C350 10 7 Administrator Mode Operations 1 0 10 7 Administrator Mode Operations The Admini
125. Correctly 12 6 C350 Specifications Specifications Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Specifications 13 13 1 Specifications 13 1 Specifications Copier C350 Specifications Type Desktop scanner printer Platen Stationary Photoconductor OPC Copying system Dry type electrophotographic method Developing system HMT developing method Fusing system Belt fixing Resolution Scanning 600 dpi Printing 600 dpi X 1800 dpi equivalent Document Types Sheets books and other three dimensional objects Size Maximum 11 X 17 Weight 4 1 2 Ib Paper types Plain paper 16 to 24 Ib thick paper 1 24 1 4 to 40 Ib thick paper 2 40 1 4 to 55 1 2 Ib thick paper 3 55 3 4 to 68 Ib overhead projector transparencies postcards envelopes label sheets Can only be fed through the 1st drawer or the bypass tray Paper sizes 1st drawer 12 1 4 X 18 to 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 LIC 4X 6L Width 3 1 2 to 12 1 4 Length 5 1 2 to 18 2nd drawer 11 X 17 L to 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L Multiple bypass tray 12 1 4 X 18 to 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L C 4X6 L Width 3 1 2 to 12 1 4 Length 5 1 2 to 18 Paper capacity 1st drawer 250 sheets plain paper 20 sheets thick paper 1 thick paper 2 thick paper 3 overhead projector transparencies postcards envelopes or label sheets 2nd drawer 500 sheets plain paper Bypass tray 150 sheets plain paper 20 sheets thick paper 1
126. Darker Touch Exit in the next C E three screens that A E appear Y E The Basic screen Bk E appears again C350 10 69 o _ 5 2 o L Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions Setting the Color Shift Correction Bk Function If a difference can be seen between the original document and the copy fine adjustments in the color shift can be made The procedure with 11 x 17 size paper loaded into the 1st drawer is described below N Condition Perform color shift corrections starting with black With the black shift as a reference perform color shift corrections for the other colors cyan magenta and yellow 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code Oo Touch Enter 4 Touch Expert User Mode 5 Touch Color Shift Correction Bk 6 Press the Start key The automatic color shift adjustment procedure begins and the test pattern is printed on 11 x 17 size paper T we Expert User Mode ick Paper and jenn Ein Im Color 2naft Correctio Color Shift Correction M color bi u Correctio cy Color Shift Correction Bk gt Center Stap Position le r Expert User Mode
127. Del 10 If authentication was set to be performed with NTLM touch NTLM below Domain Name 11 Type in the domain name for NTLM and Admin Set then touch Enter Input Domain Name O O O The domain name can contain a maximum of 64 characters The keypad can also be used to type in the number To return to the User Authentication screen touch Cancel 10 44 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 o To enter uppercase letters touch CAPS O To delete characters that have been entered touch Del 12 Touch Enter 13 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again C350 10 45 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 8 Administrator Settings Setting the LDAP Search Function This function is used to select whether or not an LDAP search is allowed in Scan mode and Mailbox mode The default setting is Prohibit R Reference For details on the Scan mode and Mailbox mode refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code Oo Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 2 4 6 Touch LDAP Search 7 Touch the key for the desired setting 8 Touch Enter
128. Delete Display in Enlarge Display Mode If the staples are empty 1 appears in the screen on the touch panel Ready to copy 1 AUCO Paper Select Paper Size C350 11 11 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears Touch _ to display the message shown in the following illustration Replace Staple Cartridge N Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears otherwise the machine may be damaged Replacing the Staple Cartridge for FS 501 N Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears otherwise the machine may be damaged 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine ma 11 12 C350 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears 2 Pull the staple cartridge holder out toward you 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder 4 Insert the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder I Staple cartridge holder C350 11 13 11 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears
129. Etc Multiple bypass tray O O O O O O 1st drawer O O O O O 2nd drawer O O O O O Single Double paper feed O O O O O cabinets Large capacity paper feed O cabinet Double sided copies O O O O O O Finished copies O O O O O O Paper Size Exe C Exe L 5 1 2 x 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 L 8 1 2 C Paper Source Etc Multiple bypass tray O O O O 1st drawer O O O O 2nd drawer O Single Double paper feed O cabinets C350 4 3 Chapter 4 Copy Paper Chapter 4 Copy Paper 4 1 Paper Specifications Paper Size Exe C Exe L 5 1 2 x 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 L 8 1 2 C Paper Source Etc Large capacity paper feed cabinet Double sided copies O O O Finished copies O O O O The single and double paper feed cabinets and the large capacity paper feed cabinet are optional If the optional automatic duplex unit is used to make double sided copies only certain types of paper can be used When making double sided copies only use paper with a weight between 17 Ib and 24 lb If the optional finisher is used to sort punch holes and staple only certain types of paper can be used Paper Capacity Paper Type Plain Paper Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Thick Paper 3 Paper Source Etc Multiple bypass tray 150 sheets 20 sheets 20 sheets 20 sheets 1st drawer 250 sheets 20 sheets 20 sheets 20 sheets 2nd drawer 500 sheets
130. Function 10 15 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 10 16 Setting the Language Select FuncitiON ooonoccciccnnnonncccnaninn 10 16 Setting the 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom Function 10 17 Setting the ACS Judgement Level Adjustment Function 10 18 Setting the Intelligent Sorting Function ooooccnccnnnnnnnccnnncino 10 19 Setting the Criss Cross Function cccccccesssceeeeseeeeeeeees 10 20 Setting the Paper Type Select Function ee eeeeeeeeeeees 10 21 Setting the Auto select paper for small originals Function 10 23 Setting the 4in1 Copy Order Function s 10 25 Setting the Centering Function ooononocnncnncnnnnacanncnacanaannns 10 26 Setting the Priority Output Tray Function aida 10 27 Setting the Priority Device Function ida aa 10 29 Viewing Part Maintenance Levels Unit Life Indicator Function aaaa asiem 10 30 Administrator Mode Operations aa aaraa 10 31 Administrator Settings aaa asar s 10 33 Setting the Top Erase Function oococncccinccnncccncncnoancarcnancnnns 10 33 Setting the Disable Sleep Mode Function oooocoonccnnccnnccc 10 34 Setting the Over Size Paper Selection Function 10 35 Setting the Locked Jobs Auto Delete Time Function 10 37 Setting the Skip Volume Track E K C Error Fun
131. Function Accessibility Mode 6 4 Touch Enter 5 Touch Exit C350 Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations 6 6 8 Checking the Settings 6 8 Checking the Settings From the Mode Check screens the current settings can be check and changed if desired There are five screens that allow you to check the settings To check the settings 1 Press the Mode Check key Mode Check The screen showing the current settings appears N Hint To display the next screen touch Next To display the previous screen touch Previous Mode Check Origina Margin J Direction d Margin y 6 16 C350 6 8 Checking the Settings 6 Mode Check Mode Check 1Black OFF First Page only set k P Numbering 4 Edge Frame E
132. Image Adjustment screen N o E ok 99 LE 0 9 If necessary specify any other copy settings 10 Press the Start key Application Functions C350 7 17 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 7 Tiling Copy Images Image Repeat Function 7 7 Tiling Copy Images Image Repeat Function Multiple copies of an original can be printed in a single sheet of paper The number of copies printed in a page the number of times the image is repeated is set according to the document size zoom ratio paper size and print area settings To use the Image Repeat function 1 Position the document s to be copied S Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Specify the desired Paper Size and Zoom settings Oo Specify the zoom ratio and paper size manually A Reference For details refer to Selecting a Paper Size Setting on page 3 18 and Specifying a Zoom Setting on page 3 13 3 Touch Application The Application screen appears 4 Touch Image Repeat Ready to copy Application i i Separate E Scan Edge Frame Erase d OHP Inter j leave 4 7 18 C350 7 7 Tiling Copy Images Image Repeat Function N 5 Select either With a D i uili be produced on one copy a ey or Without argin 5 o To reduce the image so that it fits within the allowable print area f
133. Mode 11 11 Replacing the Staple Cartridge for FS 507 ooococcccnncccnncoccnnos 11 12 Replacing the Staple Cartridge for FS 601 00 da 11 15 C350 xi 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears m 11 20 Locations of Paper MisfeedS oooooooccononcccnnonnconornnonannncnancnnnnos 11 20 Locations of Paper Misfeeds in the Enlarge Display Mode 11 21 Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications aaa 11 22 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Bypass TlaY oooocnnccinncinnnicn 11 23 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Automatic Duplex Unit 11 25 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the 1st or 2nd Drawer 11 26 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in a Paper Drawer 3rd or 4th Drawer ia aaa 11 27 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Large Capacity Paper Feed Cabinet cnt ltd reed 11 28 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Right Side Door 11 29 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Fusing Unit ee 11 33 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Reverse Automatic Document Feeder cccsecceceseeeeseeeeeeneneeseseeeeeeeneesenasenees 11 37 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in Finisher FS 501 aaa 11 41 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in Finisher FS 601 eee 11 46 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used APp rs O 11 50 Clearing Jammed Staples in Finisher FS 501 eeeeeee 11 50 Clearing Jammed Staples in Finisher FS 601 eeee 11 53 11 6 When the Message Remove Pun
134. Nek Hint As the factory default Center i E Erase is selected If you do not wish to use center erasing touch Center Erase to cancel it Ready to copy 5 Touch Enter The Original Copy screen appears again C350 3 39 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 9 Specifying Conditions of the Original 3 9 Specifying Conditions of the Original Additional document conditions such as its orientation the position of the binding margin and whether it is made of thick paper can also be specified from the Original Copy screen Ready to cop T Photo E Density The document condition can be specified in any of the following ways Document Orientation Original Direction Setting The orientation of the document can be specified Select the setting according to the document orientation Select this setting for a portrait document with the top toward the rear of this machine Select this setting for a landscape document with the top toward the rear of this machine Select this setting for a landscape document with the top toward the right side of this machine Select this setting for a portrait document with the top toward the right side of this machine As the factory default no setting is selected 3 40 C350 3 9 Specifying Conditions of the Original 3 R Condition Ifno Original Direction setting is selected d
135. Printing and printing begins N Reference For details on loading the paper refer to Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray on page 2 35 3 26 C350 3 7 Selecting Original Settings 3 3 7 Selecting Original Settings The type of document that you wish to copy can be selected N Reference For details on specifying the type of copy refer to Selecting Copy Settings on page 3 32 Ready to copy The following Original settings are available Single Sided Original 1 Setting Select this setting when single sided sheet documents are being copied Double Sided Original 2 Setting Select this setting when double sided sheet documents are being copied Books Book Copy Settings Select one of these settings when page spreads such as in books or 42 pamphlets are being copied A Frame Center Erase setting can also gm be selected The following Book Copy settings are available Book Separation Separation Book setting Select this setting to copy each of the two pages of a page spread such as an open book or pamphlet onto separate pages C350 3 27 99 _ D O lt Basic Copy Operations Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 7 Selecting Original Settings Book Spread Spread Book setting Select this setting to make a single copy containing both of the two pages of a page spread such as an open
136. Size Paper Selection Admin Set Disable Sleep Mode Selection Quer Size Paper 12x18 Locked Jobs Auto Delete Time No Skip Volume Track CE K C gt Error i No C350 10 35 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 8 Administrator Settings 6 Touch the key for the desired setting 7 Touch Enter 8 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 0O Admin Set Select paper size of Over Size Paper 12 4x18 10 36 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 Setting the Locked Jobs Auto Delete Time Function This function is used to specify the length of time until locked jobs are automatically deleted The default setting is No 1 2 Press the Utility key Touch Admin Mode Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter Touch Admin Set Touch Locked Jobs Auto Delete Time Using the keypad type in the desired length of time 1 to 99 hours O To prevent locked jobs from automatically being deleted touch No Nex Admin Set ver Siz
137. Sj O R 1ueue6rejus e6eg nnw gt ojojojojojojojojojofjojojojolojojojo ajofjofo ojojojofojojojojojojojojo o je 8 presisog ojejojojojojo ojojejsjojojojojojojojo lt fojojo Jojofojojojojofjojojojojofjo Sje 8 bunequny ies ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj lt ajojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo 5 fobew souy ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojaj lt 0jo 8 heedey oew ojojojojojojoj jojojojojojojojojojojojojajojojo gt jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj S S 5 8 ose owei 6p3 ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojaj lt 0jo 3 fubien ong ojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojolojojofojojojojojojojojojo a Z 8 Bunee ienui 4HO P OJOJO OJO O P O Od 4 5 I I IJ ITT Tl i I JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO 4 O O P P OJO 8 EJE ME 5 slg ie i 8 z 1 E El Sie 161 5 8 A 5 3 Sl llall 8 E 2 3 alo ls ls 3 Sl le E x las E 3 2 Lola REER 8 6 6 B 2 le HE ele l l s 3 5 e 8 l 2 _ lul o 2 8 5 sls 12 3 8 18 8 3 g 5 5 ol Sl s t 5 PEA 9 12 2 gt 8 5 5 5 62 5 s 2181815 s 8 3 Z 3 l s s 8 8 8 g 5 25 e 8 2 S 5 lt 8 8 2 2 5
138. TP server and the login name For details refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide 4 Refer to page 10 69 e These functions are used to make various expert adjustments such as color shift corrections and print area adjustments ae TIES e This function is used to adjust the gradation levels of images i Adjustment 4 10 32 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings Setting the Top Erase Function This function is used to set the amount of loss at the edge of the original The specified amount is erased during printing The default setting is 5 mm mb Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set O Admin Set 5 Touch Top Erase 6 Touch the key for the desired setting O Admin Set Set Erase dimensions 7 Touch Enter Enter 8 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again C350 10 33 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 8 Administrator Settings Setting the Disable Sleep Mode Function This function is used to disable the Sleep mode The default setting is No Setting th
139. Waste Toner Bottle and close all doors The waste toner bottle is not installed correctly Please insert the Image Transfer Belt Unit and close all doors The image transfer belt unit is not installed correctly Reinstall the supplies or parts or contact your service representative Replenish paper The indicated drawer has ran out of paper Load paper into the indicated drawer See the corresponding sections in Before Making Copies on page 2 1 11 70 C350 11 11 Main Messages and Their Remedies 11 Message Cause Remedy Toner cartridge X needs to be replaced soon The toner for the indicated color is about to run out Prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement Replace the Toner cartridge Since the toner for the indicated color has run out the machine is unable to make copies Replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement Replace Staple Cartridge The staples have run out Replace the staple cartridge See When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears on page 11 11 Misfeed detected Since a paper misfeed occurred the machine is unable to make copies Clear the paper misfeed See When the Message Misfeed detected Appears on page 11 20 Re insert the following of originals After clearing a paper misfeed it is necessary to
140. a JOD d 8 16 Combine Jobs Screen iaia ar 8 17 To com bine joDS 1izssasastit sas tak tes a aa rapona da 8 19 HDD Screens arnt das i tea 8 19 To print a job from the hard disk s sa 8 21 Reprint Screen niacin sid n adas st sia ki 8 22 To reprint a job saved in the memory aa 8 23 9 1 CIENTO iria 9 2 FIOUSING ii kadas taka das s ta ad st Kaa gr di 9 2 Original Gla SS viii ie aire ae Agi eae 9 2 Control P n l zs aie ied eed e 9 3 Document Transfer Belt eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaeees 9 3 Paper Take Up Roller ceeesseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeereaeeeeeneeeeseneeeseeees 9 4 Electrostatic Charger ceceescseseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesneeeeeeeseaeeeaeee 9 5 C350 ix 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 lode Operations Utility Soren oc is 10 2 Programming Recalling Copy Programs as s 10 4 Setting the Reset Mode Function 10 4 Storing Copy Programm c ccesceeseeseeeeeeeeseteaeeeeeeetieeeeeeeeneeeee 10 5 Recalling a Copy Program eecceeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeteaeeeeetaaee 10 7 Viewing Counters Counter List Function 10 8 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 1 Functions 10 10 Setting the Key Click Sound Function i 10 10 Setting the Power Save Function 10 11 Setting the Sleep Function ooonocinnnncnnnnocnnociccnnccnacnaccnns 10 13 Setting the Account Change Auto Reset
141. a list of queued print jobs touch Job Log To return to the Basic screen touch Basic To delete a job select the job and then touch Delete To change the copy settings for a job touch Change Mode Waitin print 9 Elev Waitin ACTIVE Active Ode Print ES Delete Gs ease Jess Pos Es jj Change Mode User Name The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 User name Displays the type source of the job COPIER is displayed for copy jobs 4 Status Displays the status of the job 5 Destination Indicates the tray where the printed pages will be fed out 6 File name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer E Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 8 4 C350 8 2 Job Log Screens No ltem Name Description 8 Copy Displays the specified number of pages to be printed With jobs listed as Printing the number of pages remaining to be printed is counted down 9 Job start Displays the time that the job was queued 10 Job end Displays the time when printing of the job is expected to be finished C350 8 5
142. ainer as described below 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine Ore 2 Pull out the hole punch waste container 11 60 C350 11 6 When the Message Remove Punch Scraps Appears 11 3 Empty the hole punch waste container 4 Insert the hole punch waste container into its original position 5 Slide the finisher back against the machine C350 11 61 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 7 When the Inspection Mark sig Appears 11 7 When the Inspection Mark Appears When the inspection mark appears in the lower left corner of the Basic screen the image stabilization or printing or scanning functions have become unstable R Reminder If A appears in the display contact your service representative When contacting the service representative inform them of the numbers S 1 for the example shown above listed in the screen that appears 12 12 Ready to copy Control A E user Job Name Status End Touching the inspection mark that appears in the Basic screen displays a screen like that shown below
143. al Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner 7 gt Staple 1 2 Turn 56 P 34 e 78 gt 12 Tum 56 tl 34 page 78 Hole gt Punch 1 2 Turn S6 2 Staples S REN Rg 4 te 78 Original Direction page Crosswise 7 Hole Punch 2 Staples gt gt 12 qun 56 ti 34 page 78 Corner 1 2 gt 5 6 Staple 3 4 pum 7 8 page 12 5 6 7 34m 7 8 page Hole gt Punch Original Direction 3 A Turn E E 2 Staples Lengthwise no Hole Punch T5 5 6 2 Staples 3 4 lm 17 8 page C350 14 15 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications Left Bound Double Sided Document Double Sided Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner z gt Staple 1 2 3 page gt Corner Staple z gt 1 Turn the page Hole 7 gt o Punch Original Direction 1 jum 3 2 Staples Crosswise pagel Hole Punch 2 Staples gt gt 1 Turn the page Corn
144. apacity paper feed cabinet installed No Part Name Description 14 Reverse automatic document Used for connecting the reverse automatic document feeder feeder connector hookup cord 15 Finisher connector Used for connecting the finisher hookup cord 16 Power cord connector Used for connecting the power cord 17 Power connector for the Used for connecting the external image controller s power cord external image controller 18 Network connector Used for connecting the network cable when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning 19 Parallel interface connector Used for connecting a parallel cable from the computer optional C350 2 7 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions Options 12 Upper door 11 Paper output tray 10 Front door 9 Lower paper output tray 13 Feed guide 1 Adjustable 2 Document document guide feed tray 3 Document output tray 4 Misfeed clearing cover 5 Automatic duplex unit door 6 Right side door release lever 7 3rd drawer 8 Storage drawer 4th drawer Reverse Automatic Document Feeder No Part Name Description 1 Adjustable document guide Adjust to the width of the document See p 2 41 2 Document feed tray Load the documents to be copied face up See p 2 41 3 Document output tray Collects docu
145. aper into the drawer again and then close the drawer ua Reminder Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take up roller in the 1st drawer or the film in the 2nd 3rd and 4th drawers and in the large capacity paper feed cabinet with your hands 3 Pull up the right side door release lever and then open the right side door C350 11 29 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 4 Turnthe knob M1 on the inside of the right side door clockwise to feed out the paper 5 Pull out any paper caught in the timing roller section 11 30 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 11 A CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot A Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns If you get burnt immediately cool the skin under cold water and then seek professional medical attention A CAUTION Decreased copy quality may result ifthe surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller is touched Y Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller C350 11 31 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 11 11 4 When the Message Misfeed det
146. aper that is loaded 3 22 C350 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting 3 6 Touch Y 7 Touch and Z to select the length of side Y for the paper that is loaded o Touch Y until the cursor moves below the digit that you wish to change 8 Touch Enter The paper size for the 1st drawer is set To store a non standard custom paper size Two non standard paper sizes can be stored Storing paper sizes that are used often enables the paper size to be quickly selected without having to re enter the setting o _ D O lt The following procedure describes how to store a size for non standard paper loaded into the 1st drawer 1 Touch Paper Size A screen appears showing the available Paper Size settings 2 Touch the key for the 1st drawer and then touch Change Size O For the bypass tray touch Bypass The Size Input screen appears Basic Copy Operations 3 Touch Custom Size Ready to copy The Custom Size screen appears 4 Touch Size Registration The Size Registration screen appears 39116412 1 4 5 Make sure that X is FAO selected 6 Touch and L to select the length of side X for the paper that is loaded o Touch X until the cursor moves below the digit that you wish to change 7 Touch Y C350 3 23 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting 8 Touch
147. arge Display Mode When the toner is empty the screen shown below appears Replace the Toner cartridge Open the front door and follow the instructions ALTA 11 4 C350 11 2 When the Message Replace the Toner cartridge Appears 1 1 Touch to display the message shown in the following illustration Replace the Toner cartridge Open the front door and follow the instructions Hint When the message appears replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement N Additional Information For details on replacing the toner cartridges refer to Replacing the Toner Cartridge on page 1 1 7 A WARNING Handling toner and the toner cartridges Do not throw toner or the toner cartridge into a fire gt Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns A WARNING Replacing the toner cartridge gt Do not replace the toner cartridge until the message indicating that it be replaced appears in the touch panel In addition do not replace the toner cartridge of any color other than the one indicated in the message on the touch panel C350 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 2 When the Message Replace the Toner cartridge Appears A CAUTION Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands
148. ars after step 6 Scanning has completed To continue i t 15 When scanning is complete press the Finish Key Number of scans To continue scanning remove the document position the next page of the document on the original glass and then press the Start key After all pages of the document have been scanned touch Finish and then press the Start key The copy job is queued for printing 7 Lift open the original cover or the reverse automatic document feeder if it is installed and then remove the document 8 Close the original cover or the reverse automatic document feeder if it is installed C350 2 47 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 10 Feeding the Document z Jaidey seido uiye 910 99 C350 2 48 Basic Copy Operations Basic Copy Operations Chapter 3 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 1 Specifying the Number of Copies 3 1 Specifying the Number of Copies The following procedures describe how to specify and change the setting for the number of copies To specify the number of copies Using the keypad specify the desired number of copies The specified number of copies appears in the touch panel Ready to copy Reprint
149. ater or any other similar foreign matter get inside the product immediately turn OFF the power switch unplug the power cord from the power outlet and then call your authorized service representative Do not keep using this product if this product becomes inordinately hot or emits smoke or unusual odor or noise Immediately turn OFF the power switch unplug the power cord from the power outlet and then call your authorized service representative If you keep on using it as is a fire or electrical shock could result Do not keep using this product if this product has been dropped or its cover damaged Immediately turn OFF the power switch unplug the power cord from the power outlet and then call your authorized service representative If you keep on using it as is a fire or electrical shock could result Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open flame The hot toner may scatter and cause burns or other damage GO AO CGE Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is equipped with a grounding terminal C350 Chapter 1 Installation and Operation Precautions Chapter 1 Installation and Operation Precautions Sool 1 1 1 For Safe Use CAUTION Do not use flammable sprays liquids or gases near this product as a fire could result Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place within easy reach of children Licking or ingesting any of these things could inju
150. atic document feeder or position it on the original glass 2 Press the Utility key 3 Touch Copy Program Recall 4 Touch the key for the number of the program that you wish to recall The copy program settings appear 5 Check that the copy program settings that appear are the ones that you wish to use and then touch Enter The copy settings change to the ones that are recalled O If the displayed copy program settings are not the ones that you wish to use touch Menu Utility Press job number key to view job settings Copy 1 Set The screen shown in step 4 appears again Touch the key for the correct number of the program that you wish to recall 6 Press the Start key The copy job is queued C350 10 7 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 3 Viewing Counters Counter List Function 10 3 Viewing Counters Counter List Function The number of the various types of prints can be viewed The following counters can be viewed Total counters e Total Total number of copies and printouts e Size Total number of copies and printouts on paper specified as large sized paper e Duplex Copy Total number of double sided copies e Duplex Print Total number of double sided printouts e Scan Total number of scans Black counters e Copy Total Total number of black a
151. atio Tables Copy Paper Sizes Paper Format Metric Size English Size A3 Wide 305 mm X 457 mm 12x18 A3 297 mm X 420 mm 11 3 4 X 16 1 2 A4 210 mm X 297 mm 8 1 4 X 11 3 4 A5 148 mm X 210 mm 5 3 4 X 8 1 4 A6 105 mm X 148 mm 4 1 4 X 5 3 4 B4 257 mm X 364 mm 10 X 14 1 4 B5 182 mm X 257 mm 7 1 4X 10 B6 128 mm X 182 mm 5 X 7 1 4 Postcard 100 mm X 148 mm 4 X 5 3 4 Paper Format English Size Metric Size Ledger 11X17 279 mm X 432 mm 11x 14 11x14 279 mm X 356 mm Computer 10 1 8 X 14 257 mm X 356 mm 10 X 14 10 x 14 254 mm X 356 mm 9 1 4 X 14 9 1 4 X 14 236 mm X 356 mm Legal 8 1 2 X 14 216 mm X 356 mm Foolscap Government Legal 8 1 2 X 13 216 mm X 330 mm Foolscap 8x13 203 mm X 330 mm Foolscap 8 2 3 X 13 220 mm X 330 mm Foolscap Folio 8 1 4 X 13 210 mm X 330 mm 8 1 4 X 11 3 4 8 1 4 X 11 3 4 210 mm X 301 mm Letter 8 1 2 X 11 216 mm X 279 mm Government Letter 8 X 10 1 2 203 mm X 267 mm Guarto 8x10 203 mm X 254 mm Statement Invoice 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 140 mm X 216 mm 14 2 C350 14 1 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables 14 Zoom Ratios Metric Sizes Document Paper Size Desired Paper Size Zoom Ratio A3 A4 X 0 707 297 mm X 420 mm 11 3 4 X 16 1 2 AS X 0 500 B4 X 0 866 B5 X 0 610 A4 A5 X 0 707 210 mm X 297 mm 8 1 4 X
152. ator Mode The following procedures describe how to allow access number to be entered after it has been denied If input of the administrator code is denied Turn this machine off then on again If input of access number other than the administrator code is denied Turn this machine off then on again or use the Access Lock Release function on the Admin Set screen N Reference For details on clearing access locks refer to Setting the Access Lock Release Function on page 10 42 10 40 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 2 4 6 Touch Unauthorized Access Lock 7 Touch the key for the desired setting 8 Touch Enter 9 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again Admin Set No Prohibit Box Function Prohibit w Admin Set Select to enable disable Access Lock when unauthorized access is attempted Unauthorized Access Lock Enter 10 C350 10 41 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings Setting the Access Lock Release Function
153. b select in the job display the job that you wish to delete and then touch Delete The message Job has been done improperly Check the log appears and the selected job is deleted 3 Touch Enter C350 3 3 Selecting a Color Setting 3 3 3 Selecting a Color Setting Various Color settings are available for making copies The following Color settings are available Auto Color The scanned document is determined to be either in color or in black and white and then the appropriate Color setting for the document is automatically selected If the document was determined to be in color a copy is made with the Full Color setting If the document was determined to be in black and white a copy is made with the Black setting N Hint The level for determining whether a document is in color or in black and white when making copies with the Auto Color setting can be adjusted using the ACS Judgement Level Adjustment function on the User s Choice 2 screen For more details refer to Setting the ACS Judgement Level Adjustment Function on page 10 18 fap O lt Full Color Basic Copy Operations The scanned document is copied in full color 2 Color All areas of the document determined to be in color are copied with the specified color and all areas determined to be black are copied in black The colors that can be used for the areas printed in col
154. b 68 lb Multiple bypass tray O O O O 1st drawer O O O O 2nd drawer O Single Double paper feed O ss cabinets Large capacity paper feed O cabinet Double sided copies O Finished copies O Paper Type Overhead Postcards Envelopes Label Sheets Projector Transparencies Paper Source Etc Multiple bypass tray O O O O 1st drawer O O O O 2nd drawer Single Double paper feed cabinets Large capacity paper feed cabinet Double sided copies Finished copies The single and double paper feed cabinets and the large capacity paper feed cabinet are optional 4 2 C350 4 1 Paper Specifications 4 If the optional automatic duplex unit is used to make double sided copies only certain types of paper can be used When making double sided copies only use paper with a weight between 17 Ib and 24 lb If the optional finisher is used to sort punch holes and staple only certain types of paper can be used Paper Sizes Non standard sized paper Paper Source Paper Width Paper Length Multiple bypass tray 3 1 2 to 12 1 4 5 1 2 to 18 1st drawer 2nd drawer Single Double paper feed cabinets Large capacity paper feed cabinet Standard sized paper Paper Size Over 11x17L 11x14L Legal L Letter C Letter L Size Paper Paper Source
155. book or pamphlet Book Margin Erasing Frame Center Erase settings ma a Hint In addition to a Book Copy setting a Frame Center Erase setting can be selected as desired Select the desired settings to erase the area along the binding or around the text of copies produced from a page spread such as an open book or pamphlet The following Frame Center Erase settings are available Center erasing Select this setting to erase the shadow of the book binding from the copy Frame erasing Select this setting to erase the shadow of the book edges from the copy The width of the frame to be erased can be set between 1 16 and 15 16 in Center amp frame erasing Select this setting to erase the shadow of the book binding and the shadow of the book edges from the copy The width of the frame to be erased can be set between 1 16 and 15 16 in 3 28 C350 3 7 Selecting Original Settings 3 To specify Original settings 1 Touch Orig Copy The Original Copy screen appears 2 Select the Original setting appropriate for i the document to be i l Application copied Ready to copy ori Original o i Direction y To specify Book Copy settings 1 Touch Orig Copy The Original Copy screen appears 2 Touch Book Copy The Book Copy screen appears 3 Select the desired Book Copy setting Ready to copy ram E IE 21 Era en Se y
156. ccioccccnoocncnanancnnarcncnnonncnnnos 3 2 To change the setting for the number of Copies 3 3 Stopping COPYING eccescccseeeseeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeenenseeseeeeseeesneeeeseseeee 3 4 Selecting a Color Setting cccssecsseeeesseeeesseeeesseeeesseeenseeeens 3 5 AUtO BOLlOf ssardeti s ela a TAs Antena texte Pa 3 5 Full Color eir ee aaa e eaa a aae a ect deed 3 5 O da o E E 3 5 O 3 5 Bl k ir s id sets oia OEA 3 5 To select the Color setting 3 6 C350 Selecting Output Settings ccsecceeeseneeeeesseenseesseeesseeseeeseeeees 3 8 Non Sorting Non Sort Setting ooooonccinnccnncnnnccnncccnocnnanncnnnnnns 3 8 Sorting Sort Setting cceeeesceceseeseeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeteanersaes 3 8 Crisscross Sorting Crisscross Feeding i a 3 9 Stapling with finisher FS 501 installed eee eeeeeeeeeee 3 10 Stapling with finisher FS 601 installed ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 10 A A A 3 11 To specify Output SettidgS o oooonccninnninnnnnnnnncnnnccnncnnccnnncnnnnn 3 12 Specifying a ZOOM Setting oocoononacnnnnecnnnnnnnannnsnnnncnnnnnnnnnennnos 3 13 Automatic Scaling Auto Zoom Setting ooooonicnninnnnnnnconn 3 13 Full Size x1 0 Setting 3 13 Enlarging Enlarge SettingS oonnccnnncnnncnnncnnccnoncnnocanancccnnnnnnos 3 13 Reducing Reduce SettingsS ooooccccicconncninncnnnconncccnocnracnnanccnnnos 3 13 Minimizing Minimal Setting o
157. ceeessseeeseeesneenenesseeeseeesnseeesees 6 12 6 7 Setting the Enlarged Display Clear Check Function Accessibility Mode s ssnssnnsunnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 6 14 6 8 Checking the Settings cccsecceeesseeseeeeeesseeeeseesseeenseeeneeeneees 6 16 To check the settings seems 6 16 To change the settings d 6 18 7 1 Storing the Scanned Image in the Memory Scan to Memory Function ecccseeeeeeeeenseeeseeeseeeneeeeneenees 7 2 To use the Scan to Memory function 0 0 aid 7 2 C350 vii 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 Scanning the Document in Separate Batches Separate Scan FUNCTION cseccsecseeesseeeseeesseenseeeeeeeeseeeneeenees 7 3 To use the Separate Scan function 00 d 7 4 Printing Distribution Numbers on Copies Set Numbering FUNCtION cseceseeseeeseeenseeeeeeeseeeeneeeeseeeeee 7 5 To use the Set Numbering function 0 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeetteeteeteaes 7 5 Making Copies for Filing File Margin Function o o 7 8 To use the File Margin function eerren 7 8 Erasing Sections of Copies Edge Frame Erase A segas m sa tailimt s ka souctucssvievesiaedbeeine 7 10 To use the Edge Frame Erase function 7 11 Adjusting the Document Image Image Adjustment FunctiON A tae caian erica dianas 7 14 To use the Image Adjustment function ooo
158. ch Panel Messages 1 1 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears 9 Clockwise turn the misfeed clearing dial in the folding section Feed out into the lower output tray the paper that could not be fed out in step 8 and then pull out the paper 10 Slowly pull out the stapler unit as far as possible 11 Turn misfeed clearing dial O clockwise until the cartridge removal indicators are aligned The staple cartridge moves to a position from where it can be removed A Hint If the dial is turned too far turn it counterclockwise to adjust it so the cartridge removal indicators are aligned y Removal position 11 56 C350 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears 1 1 12 Grasp both sides of the staple cartridge holder lift it up and then pull it out Staple cartridge 13 Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge 14 Pull out toward you the two staples jammed at the end of the staple cartridge R Reminder Be sure to remove two staples otherwise stapling cannot continue correctly 15 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge to its original position C350 11 57 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears 16 Insert the staple cartridge holder making sure the tabs on t
159. ch Scraps Appears 11 59 Display in Enlarge Display Mode esseeeeseeeeseeeeeneeeeees 11 59 Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container ceeee 11 60 11 7 When the Inspection Mark APPS occccnccncnnnnancnannnnnnnno 11 62 Display in Enlarge Display Mode 11 63 11 8 When the Message Malfunction detected Appears 11 64 Display in Enlarge Display Mode seerne 11 64 11 9 When The following units need to be replaced soon APP TS sssecasseceviccsadendvduancenstaresnoceesucacessncedseuecuersdtesenueisesecseuandsies 11 66 Display in Enlarge Display Mode 11 66 11 10 When the Message Please replace XXXX Appears 11 68 Display in Enlarge Display Mode 11 68 11 11 Main Messages and Their Remedies aaa 11 70 12 1 When the Print Quality Is Low aaa 12 2 12 2 When the Machine Is Not Operating Correctly cseee 12 5 xii C350 13 1 SpecificatiONS conlicniic tacita sake nantes nos dile 13 2 Copier C350 msi adi 13 2 Automatic Duplex Unit AD 501 oooocccinnccccnonnncnannnnonancnnnnnnnnannnos 13 3 Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF 601 ieee 13 4 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 101 eceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneerias 13 5 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 201 0 0 eeceeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneetas 13 5 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 401 0 0 eeceeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeteas 13 5 Finisher FS 604 iaa la 13 6 Finisher FS 501 a A o
160. chine doors or turn off the machine while it is making copies otherwise a paper jam will occur Never bring any magnetized object or use flammable sprays or liquids near the machine Always make sure that the power plug is completely plugged into the electrical outlet Always make sure that the machine s power plug is visible and not hidden by the machine Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet if the unit is not to be used for a long period of time Always provide good ventilation when making a large number of continuous copies C350 1 9 Chapter 1 Installation and Operation Precautions Chapter 1 Installation and Operation Precautions 1 1 3 Operation Precautions A CAUTION If the ventilation duct on the back side of the machine is blocked the inside of the machine will accumulate heat resulting in a malfunction or fire gt Be sure to allow a clearance of 4 in 100 mm or more at the back of the machine for the ventilation duct A CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot gt Be careful not to touch any parts around the fusing unit other than those indicated in this manual in order to reduce the risk of burns Be especially careful not to touch parts marked with warning labels and their surrounding areas gt Ifyou get burnt immediately cool the skin under cold water and then seek professional medical advice Transporting the Machine If you nee
161. cnnnnancnnns 2 17 Panel Reset Timer cccscccecseceeseeceeseeeeseseeeeeesseeeesneteesenes 2 17 Power Save Mode c ccescessceeeseeeseeteaeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeseeeeaeeeeates 2 18 Recovering From Power Save Mode oooococcccocccoccconcinncninnccnanoos 2 19 Sleep Mode iii i cies 2 19 Recovering From Sleep Mode cescesceeseeeeeeseeseeeeeneeeaees 2 19 Turning Off the Machine ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeseeeeeneeeea 2 20 When the Machine Is Turned Off eeeeesceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeees 2 20 Using the Touch Panel ccccsesssseesseeeeessceessseeessseensseseeeneneees 2 21 Description of the Touch Panel 2 21 Default SettingS iiss kainate nati 2 21 Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel sscssseeneen 2 23 To adjust the angle of the control panel 2 24 Loading Paper Into the 1st Drawer cssesssesseeseseneeeeens 2 26 Loading Paper Into the 2nd 3rd or 4th Drawer 0s100 2 31 Loading Paper Into the Large Capacity Paper Feed CAIN A 2 33 Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray aaa 2 35 Feeding the Document sssssssunsseunnsunnnnunnenunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 2 41 Loading the Document Into the Reverse Automatic Document Feeder ccccseccesseeceeseeceeseneeeeesceeeeseeeeeneeeeesenes 2 41 Placing the Document On the Original Glass eee 2 44 Specifying the Number of Copies a aaa 3 2 To specify the number Of copies ocoooocc
162. copied onto Letter size paper A11 x 17 size document can be reduced and copied onto Letter size paper Minimizing Minimal Setting The copy is slightly reduced x0 930 e Selecting the Minimal setting ensures that any part of the original positioned at the edge of the page will not be cut off in the copy e The zoom ratio of the Minimal setting can be changed to any ratio between x0 900 and x0 999 O For details on changing the zoom ratio refer to Specifying Manual Zoom Settings C350 3 13 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 5 Specifying a Zoom Setting Zooming Any zoom ratio between x0 250 and x4 000 can be specified e Touch and to select the desired zoom ratio Each time a key is touched the zoom ratio is increased or decreased by an increment of x0 001 Custom Sizing Manual Zoom Settings e Entering the zoom ratio Any zoom ratio between x0 250 and x4 000 can be specified Using the keypad type in the desired zoom ratio Up to two zoom ratios specified using the keypad can be stored e Vertical and Horizontal Scaling X Y Zoom settings The copy size can be changed by specifying different scaling proportions between x0 250 and x4 000 for the vertical and the horizontal dimensions To select a Zoom setting 1 Touch Zoom A screen appears showing the available Zoom settings 2 Select the desired Zoom setting Ready to copy
163. ction 10 39 Setting the Access Lock Function oooocccncccnncccocccinnnnancnannnnns 10 40 Setting the Access Lock Release Function 10 42 Setting the User Authentication Function 10 43 Setting the LDAP Search Function ooooccciccnnnncnnncnacincncnns 10 46 Setting the Box Function Expansion Function 10 47 Setting the Date amp Time Setting Function 00 ee 10 48 Setting the Reprint FunctioN saaaaas aaa 10 50 Setting the HDD Lock Function 0 ceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 52 Changing the Password for the Hard Disk eee 10 55 Removing the Lock Setting for the Hard Disk 10 57 Setting the Administrator Code Change Function 10 59 Setting the Panel Reset Timer Function 10 61 Setting the Add Prefix Suffix Function 10 63 Setting the Prefix Suffix Registration Function 10 65 10 9 Setting the Gradation Adjustment Function aaa 10 67 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions Setting the Thick Paper and OHP Film Image Density EE 10 69 Setting the Color Shift Correction Bk Function 10 70 Setting the Color Shift Correction C M Y Functions 10 73 Setting the Black Image Density Correction Function 10 77 Setting the Stabilizer Function 10 78 Setting the PRT Area Top Margin Function
164. ctions cannot be combined If paper is not loaded through the bypass tray de select it as the paper source If paper is loaded through the bypass tray copying cannot be interrupted G A warning message appears that the bypass tray should be selected as the paper source Previously selected settings will be canceled when paper is loaded The Mixed Original function cannot be used when making double sided copies from single sided originals The functions cannot be combined depending on the finisher model O The Original Direction and Margin functions can be specified but their settings are not applied A message appears warning that the paper is unsuitable for double sided printing The Dot Matrix Original setting 41 and the Text Enhancement setting 40 do not affect printing For example select a Text Enhancement setting 40 of 3 Darker while the Text setting 34 is selected Then if the Photo Paper Photo Density setting 37 is selected a Text Enhancement setting of 3 Darker will not affect the printing The Dot Matrix Original setting 41 and the Text Enhancement setting 40 are maintained even if all modes and functions are returned to their default settings when the panel reset timer operation is performed For example select a Text Enhancement setting 40 of 3 Darker while the Text setting 34 is
165. d Change Mode User Name 45 11 44 11 50 20 11 45 11 51 No Item Name Description 1 Message display The current machine status operating instructions warnings and precautions and other data including the number of copies selected are displayed here 2 Functions Mode setting Tabs and keys for selecting screens containing various display functions are displayed Touch a tab to display the corresponding screen The current settings appear on the Color Output Zoom or Paper Size keys 3 Settings display The current settings are shown as messages and icons 4 Job display e Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed are displayed e The current sending receiving status is shown as an icon e Touch Job Log or Job Control to display either the Job Log or the Job Control screen e For details on jobs refer to Overview of Jobs on page 8 2 5 Job Log screens e In addition to the job display various functions for checking and controlling jobs are available To return to the Basic screen touch Basic 2 14 C350 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions 2 Operating the Touch Panel To activate a function or to select a setting lightly touch the desired function or setting shown on the touch panel A CAUTION Be careful not to damage the touch panel gt Never push down on the touch panel with force and never use a hard or pointed object to make a se
166. d S POSITION to change staple or hole Output settings punch positions uto Paper elect Hole Punch 3 To change the position of the punched holes touch Change Position and then touch A below the image of the desired position for the punched holes 4 Touch Enter 3 12 C350 3 5 Specifying a Zoom Setting 3 3 5 Specifying a Zoom Setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the document or to enlarge or reduce the size of the document The zoom ratio can be specified in any of the following ways Automatic Scaling Auto Zoom Setting The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size Full Size x1 0 Setting A copy that is the same size as the document x1 000 is produced 99 _ D O lt Enlarging Enlarge Settings Various zoom settings are available for making enlarged copies on standard paper sizes from standard document sizes For example e ALetter size document can be enlarged and copied onto 11 x 17 size paper e ALegal size document can be enlarged and copied onto 11 x 17 size paper Reducing Reduce Settings Basic Copy Operations Various zoom settings are available for making reduced copies on standard paper sizes from standard document sizes For example e ALegal size document can be reduced and
167. d in the paper can be specified using the Centering function on the User s Choice 2 screen For details refer to Setting the Centering Function on page 10 26 C350 5 5 Te D O lt Original Documents Chapter 5 Original Documents 5 5 2 Print Area 5 2 Print Area Any part of the image within the area indicated below is not printed e A margin 3 16 in 5 mm from the leading edge of the paper A e A margin 1 8 in 3 mm from the leading edge of the paper B e A margin 1 8 in 3 mm on both sides of the paper C A B gt je La I C Paper output direction A 3 16 in 5 mm B 1 8 in 3 mm C C 1 8 in 3 mm 5 6 C350 Additional Copy Operations Additional Copy Operations Chapter 6 Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations 6 6 1 Blocking Document Scan Storage Reprint OFF Function 6 1 Blocking Document Scan Storage Reprint OFF Function Ifthe Reprint function is setto Yes touching Reprint OFF temporarily suspends the reprint feature preventing the scanned document from being stored in the memory N Additional Information After this machine scans a document and stores the scan in the memory the copy is printed Even after the copy is printed the scanned image remains in the memory so that copies of the same document can be repeatedly printed This is the reprint feature N Reference Fo
168. d printing it on multiple pages xxiv Printing a mirror image of the document oocccoocccnnoncccnannnnnnnnnos xxiv Reducing the image and printing multiple copies on ONO PAGE a ori XXV Managing COPYING iesst aispa asa inainte ini iaaa XXV Explanation of Basic Concepts and SymboOlS ococcconccnonncocnanonennnnnnnos xxvi Width and Length iconen ian e aaa xxvi Paper Orientation onanie e n crac xxvi Explanation of Manual Conventions aaa rases xxvii Energy Sai ia xxix What is an ENERGY STAR Product u e xxix Trademarks and Registered Trademarrks cccccsseessseesseeeeeseeeeneees xxix Legal Restrictions on Copying aaa se s XXX 1 1 For Safe Use Warning and Precaution SymbolS iaaiaa aaa 1 2 Meaning of SymbolSs eiis aaa 1 2 WARNING ocur tas 1 3 CAUTION aiie oa a ect ateos 1 4 Precautions for Routine US oooocconcccnoccccnoncncnonnnnnonnncnnonnnnnn corn 1 5 USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES For U S A Users cooocccncccooconoccconccnonanancnnnccnnncranccnnnnos 1 5 INTERFERENCE CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD ICES 003 ISSUE 3 For Canada Users oooooicoccccccccinocccocncinnos 1 6 For Users in countries not subject to Class B regulations 1 6 LED Radiation Safety oooooccnnnininccnnnconnccnocnnoncnnnnnonanararnnancnana cnn 1 6 OZone Release ccoo nd 1 6 1 2 Installation Precautions a aaa 1 7 Installation Site ici P das
169. d to the right touch J to specify the desired negative adjustment between 1 mm and 7 mm 12 Touch Enter 13 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 14 Use the Booklet and Bind settings to make another copy sample 15 Check the print result O If more adjustment is necessary return to step 1 and repeat the adjustment procedure 10 88 C350 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 1 0 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions These functions are used to control the permissions and the number of copies that can be printed for each user account In addition permissions can be set separately for the various printing operations This machine can control accounts 1 through 998 If the Volume Track Mode E K C function is set to Yes an access number must be specified for each account limiting use of this machine only to account users possessing their access number Setting the Volume Track Mode E K C Function This function is used to specify whether or not machine use will be managed N Hint Ifthis function is set to Yes permissions for remote scanning can be specified o G _ o 2 O lt 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Volume Track E K C
170. d to transport the machine over a long distance consult your technical representative Care of Machine Supplies Use the following precautions when handling the machine supplies toner cartridge paper etc Store the supplies in a location that meets the following requirements Free from direct sunlight Away from any heating apparatus Not subjected to high humidity Not extremely dusty Store in a sealed plastic bag in a cool dark place paper that has been removed from its wrapper but not loaded into the machine Only use toner that has been manufactured specifically for this machine Never use other types of toner Keep all supplies out of the reach of children 1 10 C350 1 3 Operation Precautions A CAUTION Precautions for handling toner gt Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands If your hands become soiled with toner immediately wash them with soap and water If toner gets in your eyes immediately flush them with water and then seek professional medical advice Storage of Copies F Copies that are to be kept for a long time should be kept where they are not exposed to light in order to prevent them from fading Adhesive that contains solvent e g spray glue may dissolve the toner on copies Color copies have a thicker layer of toner than normal black and white copies Therefore when a color copy is folded the toner at the fold may pee
171. da tas kas ut dk 3 5 Full Size ae ae 3 13 Function combination aea a aa ae raaa aa a e aa eena 14 25 Function combination table oooonooccccncnoccccccccnncccccncnannanccnnnnnnnnncnnnnns 14 25 Fusing Uni caian arte kak sd 11 33 GIOSSY cia A A d ii a 3 47 Gradation adjustment da 10 67 Gie liss tiesu E E 7 32 C350 15 5 Chapter 15 Index Chapter 15 Index 1 B 15 1 Index HardidiSKta tc nn 10 55 10 57 Hard disk password coocioncccnnccncnocccnnannncnnnnnononoconnn ocn rnnrn cnn rre nn rn 10 55 IDD job screen 3 TE AE 8 19 HDD lock setting i kAriwt Aten haki added te 10 52 Holdijob Screen Wii eA Kass 8 11 HolesPUNCHING trineo dpsed asi i is taas 3 11 HOUSING izst s zi tek ti 9 2 HUG tate he Ati iii tita APR aes 7 37 Image adjustment isis skiti dast ad 7 14 Image density ita ln a AA 10 69 Maga repeat aii aati chasse has as k da ata g d vis 7 18 Image pes cidad did 3 44 Increase priority screen dast 8 15 Inspection MarK siiis riais ieat e a EREE EE aE EE RA 11 62 Inst ll tionisit uti a rd 1 7 Intelligent Sorting iiie A a hae ray 10 19 Interrupt mode airna r vadi aka PA g da as Aea ak AEE a 6 8 Jammed staples siih aaae iaa ocn 11 50 11 53 Job being printed dictada 8 3 Job control screens ciao dcir len ea aed 8 11 Job list screen sevice Ne ta 8 7 Job log s reens ica a ai ete est 8 4 Job separator JS 601 cional de 13 7 JODS id ee ee 8 2 8 3 Jump volume track
172. ditional Information A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39 C350 7 31 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters To adjust the Green parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the level of green in the image 1 Touch Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Green 3 Touch tt and rre to select the desired setting and then touch Enter o To cancel the Green function touch Cancel in the Green screen N Additional Information Ready to copy Creation pplication Density 1 2 3 A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39 7 32 C350 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters 7 To adjust the Blue parameter This parameter is used to adjust the level of blue in the image N o a ok x E 0 1 Touch Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment Ready to copy pplication Image Adjustment A Application Function
173. dy to copy Orig gt Copy Density pplication color Image Adjustment Creation 4 Select either Full Size or Center Zoom ion Cancer enter Original Size Auto Detect gi ESize Input C350 7 15 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 6 Adjusting the Document Image Image Adjustment Function 5 Normally the document size is automatically detected However if you wish to specify the document size touch Original Size Input O Select the document size and then touch Enter 3 Photo n ta E_ Density pplication Era hoto Size r_ Custom iz 6 Ifthe desired document size is not listed touch Other Sizes to display a screen containing additional document sizes O Select the appropriate document size and then touch Enter Ready to copy hoto Size r_ Custom ize 7 To specify a photo size or a non standard size touch Photo Size or Custom Size O Select a photo size or touch X and Y and touch and to select the size of the original and then touch Enter Ready to copy Custom size 7 16 C350 7 6 Adjusting the Document Image Image Adjustment Function 7 8 In the Image Adjustment screen touch Enter O To cancel the Image Adjustment function touch Cancel in the
174. e Plain OHP Plain N Y 2 Thick1 Thickt en Thick3 Thick2 Thick2 Thick3 EJ 2 11 1st 2nd drawer paper empty indicator The illustration above shows the reverse automatic document feeder and large capacity paper feed cabinet installed No Part Name Description 8 Reverse automatic document When a document is loaded it is automatically fed in and feeder optional scanned one page at a time 9 Document scales Used to align the document See p 2 44 10 Media type selection dial Used to specify the type of paper loaded into the 1st drawer 11 1st 2nd drawer paper empty Indicates the amount of paper remaining indicator When the indicator is completely red the paper is empty 12 Control panel Used to start copying or to specify various settings See p 2 12 13 Original glass Place a document on the glass so that it can be scanned See p 2 44 2 6 C350 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions 2 14 Reverse automatic docu ment feeder connector 19 Parallel interface connector ss S gt cs dy TTA 15 Finisher connector 16 Power cord connector 17 Power connector for the external image L___ 18 Network connector controller The illustration above shows the reverse automatic document feeder and large c
175. e H E i Scan p color Image AdJUStment A pe Bookie Creation Original 4 7 24 C350 7 9 Making Bound Booklets Booklet Original Function 7 N 4 According to how the 5 i Create booklet from booklet Q document will be fed Select shore the oriki g select Original Glass Application 6 or Document Feeder I 0 Sti bo ivion 5 Original O Glass S gt L Document c Feeder o 5 Oo o o lt 5 Touch Enter o To cancel the Booklet Original function touch Cancel in the Booklet Original screen 6 If necessary specify any other copy settings 7 Press the Start key C350 7 25 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters By making various color adjustments you can adjust the quality of color copies as desired R Reference Samples for the Color Image Adjustment parameters can be seen in the Creative Image Book The following color image adjustment parameters are available To adjust the Brightness parameter This parameter can be used to make the image either lighter or darker 1 Touch Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Brightness Ready to copy Ready to copy Orig gt Copy Density C
176. e Paper election id 12x18 Locked Jobs uto Delete Time No Lats ees Y i CE KC Error No O Admin Set Using numerical Key Pad set time for to be automatically deleted locked jobs Additional Information To change the specified length of time press the C clear key After the C clear key is pressed No is selected C350 10 37 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 8 Administrator Settings 7 Touch Enter 8 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 10 38 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 1 0 Setting the Skip Volume Track E K C Error Function This function is used to specify whether or not other jobs can skip a job that was stopped because the maximum number of copies has been reached for the account The default setting is No N Reference For details on managing accounts refer to Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions on page 10 89 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch Skip Volume Track E K C Error Admin Set Quer Si za Paper i Selecti K js 2 j Auto
177. e Photo Density screen appears Basic Copy Operations 2 Touch Glossy Ready to copy Screen i Pattern C350 3 47 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 10 Selecting Photo Density Settings To select a Screen Pattern setting If moire patterns appears in the copied paper change the Screen Pattern setting and then make another copy to compare the effects Make the copies using the Screen Pattern setting that results in the least moire patterns 1 Touch Photo Density 2 Touch Gradation or Resolution depending on the desired copy quality ae Additional Information Moire patterns are a repeating pattern that occasionally appears when images containing a repeating pattern or lines are copied Regardless of which Screen Pattern setting is selected the moire patterns in copied papers cannot be completely removed 3 48 C350 Copy Paper Copy Paper Chapter 4 Chapter 4 Copy Paper 4 4 1 Paper Specifications 4 1 Paper Specifications Use paper that meets the following specifications R Reference For details on loading paper into the machine refer to corresponding sections in Before Making Copies on page 2 1 Paper Types Paper Type Plain Paper Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Thick Paper 3 Weight Ib 16 Ib to 24 lb 24 1 4 Ib to 40 1 4 lb to 55 3 4 lb to Paper Source Etc 40 lb 55 1 2 l
178. e and Mailbox mode refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide N Additional Information Active Directory is available only with Windows 2000 Server NTLM is available only with Windows NT Server 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code Oo Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 2 4 6 Touch User Authentication O Admin Set Disable No Prohibit Box Function Prohibit C350 10 43 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 8 Administrator Settings 7 Touch the key for the desired setting 8 If authentication was set to be performed with Active Directory touch Active Directory below Domain Name 9 Type in the domain name for Active Directory and then touch Enter O O O O Admin Set Set whether to enable network User Authentication Active Directory Not Set Not Set The domain name can contain a maximum of 64 characters The keypad can also be used to type in the number To return to the User Authentication screen touch Cancel To enter uppercase letters touch CAPS To delete characters that have been entered touch
179. e touch panel adjust the contrast dial See page 2 12 The indicator on the Start key does not light up in green An access number has not been entered Enter the access number according to the procedure described in Making Copies With an Account See page 6 10 Even though the Start key is pressed no copies are made The copy print job is queued and waiting to be printed Touch Job Log to check the jobs that are queued Wait until printing begins The machine is still warming up after just being turned on The machine takes 99 seconds to warm up after it is turned on Wait until the machine has finished warming up The machine is malfunctioning Follow any messages that appear on the touch panel The machine cannot be set to Copy mode If the indicator on the Interrupt key is lit the machine is in Interrupt mode Interrupt Specify the copy settings for the job that copying is interrupted for Press the Interrupt key to cancel Interrupt mode See page 6 8 The machine cannot be turned on The power supply cord has been unplugged from the electrical outlet Plug the power supply cord into the electrical outlet The breaker for the electrical circuit has been tripped Close the breaker for the electrical circuit C350 12 5 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 2 When the Machine Is Not Operating
180. ected Appears A Reminder If the paper is misfed as described below contact your service representative The paper is wrapped around the timing roller The paper is folded or shredded by the timing roller 11 32 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 11 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Fusing Unit N Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Pull up the right side door release lever and then open the right side door 2 Lift up the inside cover M4 and the pull out any misfed paper C350 11 33 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 3 Pull tab M2 down toward you 4 Turn dial M3 to feed out the paper 5 Pull out any paper caught in the fusing unit 11 34 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 1 1 A CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot Touching any part other than those indicated may result in burns If you get burnt immediately cool the skin under cold water and then seek professional medical attention A CAUTION Decreased copy quality may result ifthe surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller is touched Be careful not to touch
181. ection C M Y Functions If a difference can be seen between the original document and the copy fine adjustments in the color shift can be made The procedure with 11 x 17 size paper loaded into the 1st drawer is described below N Condition Before performing color shift corrections for the other colors cyan magenta and yellow perform the color shift correction for black With the black shift as a reference perform the color shift corrections for the other colors 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code Oo Touch Enter 4 Touch Expert User Mode 5 Touch Color Shift Correction C F Expert User Mode Thick Paper and OHP color SOs tt Correctio Color Shift Correction M color Pitt Correction Color Shift Correction lt Bk gt Center Staple Position C350 10 73 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 6 Press the Start key The automatic color shift adjustment procedure begins and the test pattern is printed on 11 x 17 size paper 7 Check the distance from the reference line of the black lines to the cyan lines in the test pattern along the X and Y directions O If there is no shift in the reference line skip to
182. ections of Copies Edge Frame Erase Function A Additional Information The specified width of the area to be erased is the width before copying Therefore be careful when selecting this setting while making enlarged or reduced copies Example When erasing a frame around an 11 x 17 size document and copying with a zoom ratio of x0 500 Original 11 x 17 L Copy 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 L X 0 5 gt E 3 4 in 20 mm 1 2 in 10 mm 6 Normally the document size is automatically detected However if you wish to specify the document size touch Original Size Input O Select the document size and then touch Enter Ready to copy Original Size 21170 Photo Size for Custom Size 7 Ifthe desired document size is not listed touch Other Sizes to display a screen containing additional document sizes 7 12 C350 7 5 Erasing Sections of Copies Edge Frame Erase Function O Select the appropriate document size and ry then touch Enter ii Ready to copy Chapter 7 Photo Size For Custom Size Application Functions 8 To specify a photo size or a non standard size touch Photo Size or Custom Size O Select a photo size or touch X and Y and touch and to the size of the original and then touch Enter Ready to copy Sl H SEN ustom cu Size
183. ed o _ 5 2 O lt Select the job whose copy settings you wish to change and then touch Change Mode The Job Mode Change screen appears Select the key for the setting that you wish to change The corresponding Job Mode Change screen appears Managing Jobs Specify the new settings and then touch Enter Check that the setting for the job has been changed and then touch Enter Deleting a Queued Job Jobs listed as Waiting Print can be deleted 1 Touch Job Log The list of queued jobs is displayed Select the job that you wish to delete and then touch Delete The job is deleted Canceling a Job Being Printed Follow the procedure described below to delete a queued job 1 While a job is being printed press the Stop key Printing stops and a screen appears allowing you to select which job to cancel Select the job that you wish to delete and then touch Delete After touching Delete the message Job has been done improperly Check the log appears and the job being printed is canceled o To quit canceling the job press the Start key Printing continues Touch Enter C350 8 3 Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 8 2 Job Log Screens 8 2 Job Log Screens The list and details of queued jobs can be viewed The following Job Log screens provide a variety of functions active ode Print Scans heck og Active Jobs Screen To view
184. ed an N Ye 27 Press the Utility key Thick1 Touch Admin Mode Thick Y S 2 Using the keypad type in the Thicks Thiek2 administrator access code Thick2 Thick3 By o Touch Enter 2 Touch Expert User Mode Touch PRT Area Top Margin Expert User Mode Color Shift Correction M PRT Area e I Correction Y dl center Staple Position color Shift Correction lt Bk gt al 10 80 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 1 0 8 Press the Start key i Expert User Mode The test pattern is Test Print for Gradation Adyust will bi e Press START The Margin can also be Key printed on 11 x 17 size Sasustea by Using tn 4 paper ej 3 0 3 Omm 9 Check that the top margin of the test pattern is between 4 5 mm and 5 5 mm If the top margin is within the specified range skip to step 14 10 If the top margin is less than 4 5 mm touch to specify the desired positive adjustment between 0 1 mm and 3 0 mm a 5 0 mm 0 5 mm 11 If the top margin is more than 5 5 mm touch to specify the desired negative adjustment between 0 1 mm and 3 0 mm 12 Press the Start key The adjusted test pattern is printed on 11 x 17 size paper 13 Check the print result Make sure that the top
185. ed regardless of the margins In this case the area of the image within the margins at the edge of the paper is lost 5 Normally the document size is automatically detected However if you wish to specify the document size touch Original Size Input O Select the document size and then touch Enter Ready to copy Original size Photo Size For Custom Size C350 7 55 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 6 Ifthe desired document size is not listed touch Other Sizes to display a screen containing additional document sizes O Select the Ready to copy appropriate V 8 document size and E pplication then touch Enter rigi Enter 7 To specify a photo size or a non standard size touch Photo Size or Custom Size O Select a photo size or touch X and Y and touch and to select the size of the original and then touch Enter 8 In the Postcard screen touch Enter o To cancel the Postcard function touch Cancel in the Postcard screen 9 If necessary specify any other copy settings 10 Press the Start key 7 56 C350 Managing Jobs Managing Jobs Chapter 8 Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 8 1 Overview of Jobs HS amp 6 Status Print in Waiting Print Waiting Print Waiting Print
186. ed on the original glass This method works best with books and other documents that cannot be fed through the reverse automatic document feeder 1 Lift open the original cover or the reverse automatic document feeder if it is installed 8 Condition When placing the document on the original glass be sure to lift open the original cover or the reverse automatic document feeder if it is installed 15 or more Ifthe document is placed on the original glass without lifting the original cover or reverse automatic document feeder 15 or more the correct document size will not be detected 2 Position the document face down onto the original glass O Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the rear or the left side of the machine 2 44 C350 2 10 Feeding the Document 2 3 Align the document with the document scales Document scale O For transparent or translucent documents place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the document over the document Blank sheet O For bound documents spread over two facing pages such as a book or magazine position the top of the document toward the back of the machine with ie binding aligned with the mark in the top document a as i Pa shown dE od C350 2 45 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 10 Feeding the Document N
187. ed to clean the surface of the LED unit for example when replacing the image transfer belt unit 4 Charger cleaning tool Used to clean the electrostatic charger wire for example when incorrect copies are produced 5 Imaging unit securing lever Used when installing and replacing the imaging units C350 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions Control Panel 1 Utility key 2 Touch panel 3 Keypad 4 Box 5 Scan 6 Copy key key key E Gea 7 Power 17 Mode Es G2 Save key Check key Access 8 Access Accessibility key 16 Accessi ES 9 Interrupt bility key Enlarge Display key 0 Contrast 15 Enlarge Display key 14 Contrast dial Start Stop Reset Ei 1 ones IA 13 Start 12 Stop 11 C clear key key key No Part Name Description 1 Utility key Press to display the Utility screen 2 Touch panel e Displays various screens and messages e Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel 3 Keypad e Use to type in the number of copies to be produced e Use to type in the zoom ratio Use to type in the various settings 4 Box key e Press to enter Box mode e Box mode
188. eds to be replaced soon N Hint When the message appears replace the specified supplies or part according to your maintenance agreement R Additional Information After the message The following units need to be replaced soon the message Please replace XXXX appears and the machine stops operating The number of pages that can be printed from the time that the message The following units need to be replaced soon appears until the time that the message Please replace XXXX appears differs depending on the printing conditions and the supplies or part C350 11 67 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 10 When the Message Please replace XXXX Appears 11 10 When the Message Please replace XXXX Appears When it is time to replace supplies or a part within this machine a message appears indicating that the part or supplies should be replaced and the machine stops operating As an example the message indicating that the yellow imaging unit should be replaced when replaceable by the user is shown below Please replace Imaging Unit Open the Front door and follow the Replacing Instruction Status 295 Display in Enlarge Display Mode When the time to replace supplies or a part is reached a screen similar to the one shown below appears Please
189. een tion Screen 5 Corner d Staple ti 2 page 7 gt 112 page Hole gt Punch jum 2 2 Staples Original Direction i page Crosswise rr Hole Punch 2 Staples TE p 1 Tum 2 page Corner gt Staple 1 Turn 2 the page gt 1 Turn 2 Y the E page Hole gt Punch Original Direction f frum 2 2 Staples Lengthwise the page Hole Punch gt gt 2 Staples Turn 2 the page C350 14 19 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications Top Bound Double Sided Document p Single 2in1 Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner gt Staple 1 2 puro 3 4 pada T gt 1 2 rum 3 4 the page Hole gt Punch 2 Turn 3 4 2 Staples Original Direction hor Crosswise pa Hole Punch 2 Staples 0 o gt 1 2 frum 3 4 he page Corner 7 gt Staple 1 Turn 3 2 nto 4 7 gt 1 jum 3 ti 2 page 4 Hole 4 gt Y 3 Punch o T Original Direction 02 the 4 2 Staples Lengthwise page Hole Punch 2 Staples gt 1 Tan 3 rela
190. een specified from the Utility mode the screen for entering the account access code appears after Reprint is touched Using the keypad type in the 8 digit access code and then touch Enter N Reminder When the machine is turned off all saved jobs are deleted and can no longer be recalled To return to the Basic screen touch Basic To delete a job select the job and then touch Delete 8 22 C350 8 3 Job Control Screens 8 EA CA occ Name Dest File Name Orig Copy Start End Select jobs to reprint C IK COPIER Elev ee 10 11 15 11 22 2 ME copier Elev 11 21 T MI copier Elev 1 10 11 15 11 21 9 S 9 beete hors lobes priorrepess fo E lt D The following details of the jobs are displayed 2 No ltem Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 User name Displays the type source of the job COPIER is displayed for copy jobs 4 Destination Indicates the tray where the printed pages will be fed out 5 File name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer 6 Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 7 Copy Displays the specified number of pages to be printed With jobs listed as Printing the
191. el reset operation refer to Setting the Panel Reset Timer Function on page 10 61 2 Position the document s to be copied 6 8 C350 6 4 Interrupting a Copy Job Interrupt Mode 6 3 Select the desired copy settings 4 Press the Start key The job that printing was interrupted for is added to the queue 5 After the interrupting job is finished printing press the Interrupt key The indicator on the Interrupt key goes off and Interrupt mode is canceled N Hint When printing for the interrupting job is finished printing of the interrupted job automatically continues If printing of the interrupting job is finished the Interrupt mode is canceled and the settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted Ke _ 7 o lt Additional Copy Operations C350 6 9 Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations 6 6 5 Making Copies With an Account 6 5 Making Copies With an Account Using the Volume Track Mode E K C The total number of copies allowed and the number of copies allowed for certain paper sizes can be set for up to 998 accounts e Ifthe Volume Track Mode function is set to Yes printing is only possible by users who enter their assigned access number O Copying cannot be performed by anyone without knowledge of an account access number O For access numbers contact your administrator e The accounts can be managed using the Adm
192. elt with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent See page 9 3 The selected paper size is larger than the document with a Zoom setting of x1 000 Select a paper size that is the same size as the document See page 3 18 Otherwise select the Auto Zoom setting to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size See page 3 13 The orientation of the document is different from the orientation of the paper with a Zoom setting of x1 000 Select a paper size that is the same size as the document Otherwise select a paper orientation that is the same as that of the document The copy was reduced to a size smaller than the paper a reduced zoom ratio was selected Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the document size to the selected paper size See page 3 13 Otherwise select the Auto Zoom setting to reduce the copy to the selected paper size See page 3 13 12 4 C350 12 2 When the Machine Is Not Operating Correctly 12 12 2 When the Machine Is Not Operating Correctly Symptom Possible Cause Remedy Nothing appears in the touch panel The indicators on the Start key and Power Save key light up in green The machine is in Power Save mode Press any key in the control panel to cancel Power Save mode See page 2 18 The contrast adjusting dial for the touch panel has been set either too light or too dark While looking at th
193. emory can be printed and jobs can be prioritized for output The following Job Control screens provide a variety of functions Fi ocked Increase Combine F ay passo priorieypions HD fReprint o _ o 2 O lt Hold Job Screen Touch Job Control The Hold Job screen containing the list of jobs scanned and stored in the memory appears From the Hold Job screen jobs can be printed and removed from the memory R Additional Information Ifaccounts have been specified from the Utility mode the screen for entering the account access code appears after Job Control is touched Using the keypad type in the 8 digit access code and then touch Enter Nix Reference For details on setting the Scan to Memory function refer to Storing the Scanned Image in the Memory Scan to Memory Function on page 7 2 Managing Jobs To return to the Basic screen touch Basic C350 8 11 Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 3 Job Control Screens Status Dest File Name Orig Copy A Select job to print t rea_Elev 1 1 10 Job Stored Job Stored Change Mode eto ARDE Prosper ro Jero The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display job
194. en the Volume Track Data E K C counters are not initialized however the Volume Track mode E K C cannot be canceled In order to keep Volume Track Data E K C counter values when canceling Volume Track mode E K C print the data For details on printing Volume Track Data E K C counters refer to Printing Volume Track Data E K C Counters on page 10 100 o _ 5 2 o L 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Volume Track E K C 5 Touch Volume Track Mode E K C Utility Mode Operations Volume Track Data i CE K C C350 10 91 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 6 Touch No and then touch Enter The Initialize screen appears 7 Touch Yes and then touch Enter The Volume Track Data E K C counters are initialized and then the Volume Track mode E K C is canceled Volume Track O CE KC Enable Disable Volume Track E K C Volume Track Mode Volume Track O CE KC Choose Yes to delate all Volume Track E K C Data and then press Enter to confirm Initialize 10 92 C350 10 11 Supervis
195. ensions are mentioned in this manual the first value always refers to the width of the paper shown as Y in the illustration and the second to the length shown as X Paper Orientation Lengthwise 7 If the width Y of the paper is shorter than the length X the paper has a vertical or portrait orientation indicated by either L or Ly Crosswise D If the width Y of the paper is longer than the length X the paper has a horizontal or landscape orientation indicated by either C or xxvi C350 Explanation of Manual Conventions Explanation of Manual Conventions A WARNING gt Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries gt Observe all warnings in order to ensure safe use of the machine A CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage gt Observe all cautions in order to ensure safe use of the machine N Reminder Text highlighted in this manner indicates operation precautions Carefully read and observe this type of information N Additional Information Text highlighted in this manner provides more detailed information concerning the operating procedure N Hint This includes reference and supplemental information concerning operating procedures and other text We recommend that this information be
196. er gt Staple 1 Turn 3 the page RT Corner 2 Staple gt 1 Turn 3 the page Hole a PRI Punch Original Direction gt Lengthwise o 1 Tum 2 3 2 Staples page T Hole 2 Punch E e 2 Staples Turn 3 the page 14 16 C350 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 1 4 Chapter 14 Appendix Left Bound Double Sided Document Double 2in1 Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner Staple J gt 1 2 rum 3 4 5 6 the page Corner Staple T gt 1 2 Turn 5 Ithe page Hole i gt 34 Punch Original Direction lo 12 am 56 2 Staples Crosswise page PPT Hole Punch HL gt 2 Staples 1 2 lnm 5 6 the page Corner 7 gt Staple 1 jum 4 5 ae 6 al Corner 3 Staple NE 1 Turn 5 2 ie 6 Hole a ii Punch i Direction 51 Tum F 5 2 Staples engthwise 19 m 6 a T Hole 3 Punch 4 2 Staples 0 6 gt TT 5 2 page 6 C350 14 17 Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications Left Bound Double Sided Document Double 4in1 Copy
197. er product Failure to observe this precaution could result in a fire or electrical shock e Use only the specified power source voltage Failure to do that could result in a fire or electrical shock Do not use a multiple outlet adapter to connect any other appliances or machines Use of a power outlet for more than the marked current value could result in a fire or electrical shock Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand as an electrical shock could result Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet Failure to do this could result in a fire or electrical shock e Donotscratch abrade place a heavy object on heat twist bend pull on or damage the power cord Use of a damaged power cord exposed core wire broken wire etc could result in a fire or breakdown Should any of these conditions be found immediately turn OFF the power switch unplug the power cord from the power outlet and then call your authorized service representative e Do not use an extension cord in principle Use of an extension cord could cause a fire or electrical shock Contact your authorized service representative if an extension cord is required Do not place a flower vase or other container that contains water or metal clips or other small metallic objects on this product Spilled water or metallic objects dropped inside the product could result in a fire electrical shock or breakdown Should a piece of metal w
198. er to Paper Specifications on page 4 2 2 40 C350 2 10 Feeding the Document 2 2 10 Feeding the Document Loading the Document Into the Reverse Automatic Document Feeder The reverse automatic document feeder automatically feeds in scans then feeds out each page of a multi page document one page at a time The correct type of document must be loaded in order for the reverse automatic document feeder to function properly R Reference For details on the correct types of documents that can be loaded refer to Appropriate Document Types Using the Reverse Automatic Document Feeder on page 5 2 For details on loading documents with mixed paper sizes refer to Copying Documents of Mixed Sizes Mixed Original Function on page 6 3 1 Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the document Document support O lflarge sized documents are to be loaded pull out the document support 2 Load the document pages to be copied face up into the document feed tray O Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the rear or the right side of the machine C350 2 41 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 10 Feeding the Document 3 Adjust the document guides to the size of the document S Reminder Be sure to load the document correctly otherwise the pages may not be fed in straight 4 Touch
199. er type Plain paper 13 1 4 lb to 29 1 4 lb Weight Document paper size Refer to the Mixed Originals Paper Sizes table below Paper capacity 100 sheets 21 1 4 Ib Mixed Originals Paper Sizes Possible combinations for mixed original paper sizes LO _ g Maximum Document Width gt 11 x 17 Letter Legal L Letter L 5 1 2 x 5 1 2 x lt Document Size L C 8 1 2 C 8 1 2 L 5 11x17L O O Letter C etter O O 9 Legal L O O O O O 5 Letter L O O O O O S 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 C O O O S Q 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 L x O 5 O Possible 5 E Not possible O N Additional Information Indicates the widest document size of the mixed originals Indicates document sizes that can be specified together with the maximum document width C350 5 3 Chapter 5 Original Documents 5 5 1 Document Feeding Document Precautions Using the Reverse Automatic Document Feeder The following types of documents should not be loaded into the reverse automatic document feeder otherwise paper misfeeds or damage to the document may occur Instead these types of documents should be positioned on the original glass Curled documents Wrinkled or torn documents Highly translucent or transparent documents such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper Documents with binder holes Documents with many binder holes such
200. folds of the flaps are firmly pressed otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may occur When loading envelopes load them with the flap side up as shown in the illustration If the envelopes are loaded with the flap side down a paper misfeed may occur The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on 2 38 C350 2 9 Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray N Reminder Do not load more than 20 label sheets into the bypass tray Side to be printed on 4 Select the appropriate paper type settings N Hint Paper Type If postcards are loaded set the media type selection dial to 91163g m Thick2 Ready to copy Normal MITA Side to be printed on L Enter Thick 2 Thick 3 i Envelope RETA If label sheets are loaded set the media type selection dial to Thick1 C350 2 39 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 9 Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray To print on the back side of previously printed plain paper or thick paper using manual double sided copying select the appropriate paper type setting and then touch 2nd Side S Reference For details on selecting the paper size refer to Selecting a Paper Size Setting on page 3 18 For details on paper types ref
201. g Paper Into the 1st Drawer on page 2 26 Basic Copy Operations 1 Touch Paper Size A screen appears showing the available Paper Size settings 2 Touch the key for the 1st drawer Ready to copy 3 Touch Change Size The Size Input screen appears Bypass Reserve 4 C350 3 19 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting 4 Select the setting for the size of paper that is loaded O Ifthe desired paper size is not listed touch Other Sizes and then select the paper size Reference Ready to copy C S ustom ize For details on specifying a custom paper size refer to To set a non standard custom paper size on page 3 22 5 Touch Enter The paper size for the 1st drawer is set 3 20 C350 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting 3 To specify the size of the paper in the bypass tray Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto paper that is not loaded into a paper drawer or if you wish to copy onto special paper N Reference For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray refer to Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray on page 2 35 1 Touch Paper Size A screen appears showing the available Paper Size settings 2 Touch Bypass The Size Type screen appears 3 Select the size of the paper to be loaded Ready to copy
202. ginal Size Input O Select the document size and then touch Enter 3 Photo n ta E_ Density pplication Era hoto Size r_ Custom iz 5 Ifthe desired document size is not listed touch Other Sizes to display a screen containing additional document sizes O Select the document size and then touch Enter Ready to copy hoto Size r_ Custom ize 6 To specify a photo size or a non standard size touch Photo Size or Custom Size O Select a photo size or touch X and Y and touch and to select the size of the original and then touch Enter Ready to copy Custom size 7 46 C350 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 7 7 Specify how the original image will be enlarged according to the following methods N o a ok 99 E 0 o To specify the final image size continue with step 8 o To specify an enlargement ratio skip to step 14 O To specify the paper size for each part of the enlarged image skip to step 18 o To cancel the Multi Page Enlargement function touch Cancel in the Multi Page Enlargemt screen 8 Touch Image Size Divide the image of original into s and expand each of them to Application Functions tancer Enter Original Size Auto Detect Paper Size BB 9 Select the final image size and then
203. h Margin Original must be in upright position Then select Posit The Margin screen appears Pl p 5 Touch A below the Margin setting appropriate for the document to be copied and then touch Enter O Ifthe position of the binding margin for the document is different from the selected Margin setting copies made while erasing certain areas will not be printed correctly o When loading a document with a binding margin position the top of the document toward the rear of this machine For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 6 If a thick document is being copied touch Thick Original C350 3 43 o _ D o al Basic Copy Operations Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 10 Selecting Photo Density Settings 3 10 Selecting Photo Density Settings The print result can be adjusted according to the image quality of the document Ready to cop Screen Pattern Text amp Photo Printed i Image The following Photo Density settings are available Image Types Text amp Photo setting Select this setting when copying documents containing both text and RE images Photo Paper setting Select this setting when copying documents printed on photographic paper photographs A smooth copy is produced Printed Image setting Select this setting when copying printed documents such as pamphle
204. h Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 3 Close the horizontal transport unit cover 4 Open front door FN4 5 Turn knobs FN5 clockwise at the same time S Hint Ifthe paper can be seen from the paper output tray turn knobs FN5 counterclockwise at the same time to feed out any misfed paper 6 Close front door FN4 11 42 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 1 1 7 While holding misfeed clearing guide FN7 open pull out any misfed paper 8 Open upper cover FN1 A CAUTION Metallic parts on the inside of the upper cover are very hot Touching any part other than the paper may result in burns C350 11 43 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 9 While holding misfeed clearing guide FN2 open pull out any misfed paper 10 While holding misfeed clearing guide FN3 open pull out any misfed paper 11 Close upper cover FN1 Oo If the job separator is not installed skip to step 15 11 44 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 1 1 12 If the job separator is installed Open the job separator 13 Remove any misfed paper 14 Close the job separator 15 While holding misfeed clearing
205. han the W mark Paper other than plain paper cannot be fed from the 2nd 3rd or 4th drawer If you wish to make copies onto paper other than plain paper feed it through the bypass tray or the 1st drawer 5 Close the paper drawer 2 32 C350 2 8 Loading Paper Into the Large Capacity Paper Feed Cabinet 2 2 8 Loading Paper Into the Large Capacity Paper Feed Cabinet 1 Press the drawer release button 2 Pull out the paper drawer for the large capacity paper feed cabinet R Reminder Ifthe machine is turned off the paper drawer for the large capacity paper feed cabinet cannot be pulled out even after the drawer release button is pressed Be sure to first turn on the machine 3 Loadihe paper into the right side of the paper drawer for the large capacity paper feed cabinet so that the side of the paper to be printed on the side facing up when the package was unwrapped faces up C350 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 8 Loading Paper Into the Large Capacity Paper Feed Cabinet A Reminder Be careful not to touch the film If the paper is curled flatten it before loading it Do not load so many pages that the top of the stack is higher than the W mark Paper other than plain paper cannot be fed from the large capacity paper feed cabinet If you wish to make copies onto paper other than plain pape
206. he holder slide along the rails in the compartment 17 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place O Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed 18 Carefully move the stapler unit back into its original position 19 Close the front door 20 Slide the finisher back against the machine 11 58 C350 11 6 When the Message Remove Punch Scraps Appears 1 1 11 6 When the Message Remove Punch Scraps Appears If the punch kit PK 501 is attached to finisher FS 601 the following message will appear when the hole punch waste container is full If it can be emptied by the user Ready to copy Remove Punch Scraps Delete Display in Enlarge Display Mode If the hole punch waste container is full 1 appears in the screen on the touch panel Ready to copy Mixed Original C350 11 59 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 6 When the Message Remove Punch Scraps Appears Touch 1 to display the message shown in the following illustration if it can be emptied by the user Remove Punch scraps Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container Empty the hole punch waste cont
207. he left edge of the paper in comparison to the paper feed direction for the second side during automatic double sided copying The left margin of the print area in double sided copies can be adjusted for each paper drawer N Condition The left margin of the print area in double sided copies is adjusted during manufacturing of the machine Normally the left margin will not need to be adjusted The procedure with 11 x 17 size paper loaded into the 1st drawer is described below 1 Load 11 x 17 size paper into the 1st drawer 2 Press the Utility key 3 Touch Admin Mode 4 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 5 Touch Expert User a Mode O Expert User Mode 6 Touch PRT Area Dup Left Margin r Color Shift Correction C Color Shift Center Staple Correction Bk gt H Position 10 84 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 1 0 7 Touch 1st Tray O Expert User Mode AE S LE 8 Press the Start key Basusted by using the Ar Keg The test pattern is Bape Peet margi printed on 11 x 17 size paper MN Letter Normal 9 Check that the left margin of the test pattern for the second side is between 2 5 mm and 3 5 mm If the left margin is within the specified range skip to step 14 c 3 0mm 0 5 m
208. hen copying document smaller than 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 L be sure to position it on the original glass If the reverse automatic document feeder is used a paper misfeed or damage to the document may occur For details on the types of documents that can be used with the reverse automatic document feeder refer to Original Documents on page 5 1 If this function is set to OFF the message Original size cannot be detected appears when the Start key is pressed if the Auto Paper Select setting was selected and the size of the document is too small or no document is loaded o G _ o 2 o r In this case the paper drawer desired paper must be selected in order to make copies If this function is set to ON copies will be made using paper in the specified paper drawer even if the document is too small or no document is loaded 1 Press the Utility key Touch User s Choice 2 User s Choice 2 Utility Mode Operations 2 3 Touch 2 3 4 Touch Auto select paper for small originals C350 10 23 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 5 Touch the key for the desired setting User Choice 2 P gt 5 Choose to activate a paper tray for odd size o If ON was orig
209. her FS 601 00 da 11 46 Clearing a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit 11 25 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 11 23 C350 Chapter 15 Index Chapter 15 Index 1 B 15 1 Index Clearing a paper misfeed in the fusing Unit ooococinnccncnncinnnccncncnanns 11 33 Clearing a paper misfeed in the paper feed cabinet 06 11 28 Clearing a paper misfeed in the reverse automatic document TCCOGl nha OO 11 37 Clearing a paper misfeed in the right side door aida 11 29 Color adjustment Samples ou eee eeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeaeetieeeeeeeeneeee 7 39 Color balanceada air 7 34 Color image adjust cooococcccnnnccnocicocccionnnancnonc aaa 7 26 Color separatista Ai 7 42 Golor settindf 3 tiska j t sausa lidad 3 5 3 6 Color shift correction iiada s 10 70 Combine jobs screen ou eee aaa 8 17 Components cutter ahi eee 2 2 Confirmation Deep iscitati neneiia ai 10 10 E OIRN URE A AEA EE A T T 7 28 Control panel titi ita n a 2 12 9 3 Control panel angle oooncconcccinccinocononanonononononncnnnnnrnnncnnn aaa 2 23 Copier C35 csi a Ra E a a Aaaa is 13 2 COV 1 Set iest ties aa a eee ee te 6 6 Copy Paper x adie nies hes ie nl a 4 2 Copy paper siZ s zis t das data k Mia T 14 2 COPY Progra MS neimare Ae a i a a aa 10 4 10 5 Copy setting 3 s tot ee 3 32 3 38 Comer stable usina limar 3 10 Counter iS ss seu do in or Epa 10
210. her to print multiple jobs as one N Reference For details on printing scanned images stored in the memory refer to Hold Job Screen on page 8 11 For details on combining jobs refer to Combine Jobs Screen on page 8 17 To use the Scan to Memory function 1 Position the document s to be copied A Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Application The Application screen appears 3 Touch Scan to Memory o Tocancelthe Scan to Memory function touch Scan to Memory again i Separate i Scan m rr Image i Edge Frame Adi stment Erase 4 4 Image i AdJUSTMENT A 4 If necessary specify any other copy settings r y EY FORD incer Bookiec Creation leave 4 Original al 5 Press the Start key 7 2 C350 7 2 Scanning the Document in Separate Batches Separate Scan Function 7 7 2 Scanning the Document in Separate Batches Separate Scan Function N o a ok x E 0 A document can be divided and scanned in a number of batches then be combined and treated as a single copy job The maximum number of document pages that can be loaded into the reverse automatic document feeder is 100 However by copying using the Separate Scan function a document exceeding 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job In addition this function allow
211. i page document can be fed automatically This feed method can also be used with double sided documents and is perfect for multi page double sided documents See page 2 41 Using the original glass The document is placed directly on the original glass then scanned Each page of the document must be positioned manually i e the previous one must be removed and the next one placed on the original glass This method is best with books and other documents that cannot be fed through the reverse automatic document feeder See page 2 44 Appropriate Document Types Using the Reverse Automatic Document Feeder N Reminder Be sure to use documents appropriate for the feed method being used otherwise a paper misfeed or damage to the document may occur Plain paper Single Sided Documents Double Sided Documents Document paper Plain paper 9 1 4 to 34 Ib Plain paper 13 1 4 lb to 29 1 4 Ib type Weight Document paper 11 x 17 L Legal L Letter L C 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 L C 11 x 15 size Paper capacity 100 sheets 21 1 4 lb 5 2 C350 5 1 Document Feeding 5 Thick paper Single Sided Documents Document paper type Plain paper 34 1 4 Ib to 55 3 4 Ib Weight Document paper size 11 x 17 L Legal L Letter L C 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 L C 11 x 15 Paper capacity 38 sheets 55 3 4 Ib Document of mixed sizes Single Sided Documents Double Sided Documents Document pap
212. ice 1 Select whether you want to reset the panel when Account is changed Account Change C350 10 15 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions Setting the Language Select Function This function is used to change the display language for the screens in the touch panel The default setting is English 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch User s Choice 2 3 Touch Language Select 4 Touch the key for the desired language 5 Touch Enter 6 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again User s Choice 2 English Preset PACS Judgement Level i Adjustment al Dis Yes Yes User s Choice 2 Select the default language English Japanese 10 16 C350 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 10 Setting the 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom Function This function is used to specify the zoom ratios for 2in1 and 4in1 copying and booklet binding If this function is set to Preset the recommended zoom ratio is automatica
213. ies Set Numbering Function 7 7 3 Printing Distribution Numbers on Copies Set Numbering Function N o a ok x E O When printing multiple copies of a document each copy set can be printed with a distribution number in the background Document Copy Application Functions N Condition The Set Numbering function is only available if the optional hard disk and expanded memory unit are installed To use the Set Numbering function 1 Position the document s to be copied R Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Application The Application screen appears C350 7 5 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 3 Printing Distribution Numbers on Copies Set Numbering Function 3 Touch Set Numbering Using the keypad type Ready to copy x Hint When the Set Numbering function is used the Sort Output setting is automatically selected Image E AdJUSTMENT A SM mage di stment 4 3 Creation If two or more copies are being printed the distribution number increases by 1 with each consecutive copy set However if only one copy is printed the number specified as the first distribution number is repeated Input the starting number to be u the in the first distribution humerseal Keg P number to be printed S Photo o The first
214. if it is installed 11 Press the Start key The printed test pattern is scanned 12 Based on the scanned image the gradation levels are automatically adjusted After the gradation levels are adjusted the Admin Mode screen appears again 13 Repeat steps 5 through 12 three times 14 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again 10 68 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 1 0 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions Setting the Thick Paper and OHP Film Image Density Function This function is used to adjust the density of the image printed on thick paper and overhead projector transparencies The default settings are the standard settings middle settings 1 2 Press the Utility key Touch Admin Mode Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter Touch Expert User Mode Touch Thick Paper and OHP Film Image Density Expert User Mode Stabilizer Color Shift Correction PRT Area C lt Top Margin q EVA Correction M PRT Area Left Margin Color Shift Center Staple Correction Bk gt H Position Touch and to adjust the Expert User Mode image density Base ahd eo for Thick Touch Enter Film rhage pensity ana Lighter
215. igit access code and then touch Enter N Reference For details on setting the Scan to HDD functions refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide To return to the Basic screen touch Basic To delete a job select the job and then touch Delete C350 8 19 Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 8 3 Job Control Screens IEC Dasic M Name Status File Name Orig Copy t rt Select the job to j Job F release from HDD to ME 200000 Brea E Held Jobs Job Stored Job Stored Delete Hold sob Pess Psor aes MED The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 User name Displays the type source of the job 4 Status Displays the status of the job 5 File name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer 6 Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 7 Copy Displays the specified number of pages to be printed With jobs listed as Printing the number of pages remaining to be printed is counted down 8 Job start Displays the time that the job was queued 8 20 C350 8 3 Job Control Screens 8 To print a job from the hard disk
216. il a value begins to change when a touch panel key for changing the value is held down can be specified The default setting for the start time is 0 8 second and the default setting for the repeat interval is 0 3 second N Condition The settings for the repeat feature are only applied in the Enlarge Display mode they are not applied when the screen is displayed normally R Hint The Enlarge Display mode is limited to basic copy tunctions The function and setting names and the illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily For details refer to the Enlarge Display Mode User s Guide 1 Press the Accessibility key Accessibility EA O 6 12 C350 6 6 Setting the Key Repeat Start Interval Function Accessibility Mode 6 2 Touch Key Repeat gt Start Interval yuma CEA S Start interval 0 8 sec 0 3 sec No 3 Touch LZ and L to specify the desired length of time until the repeat feature for a key TT starts between 0 1 and Mza nia 3 0 seconds Time to Start Interval 0 143 0 0 1x3 0 4 Touch Enter Ke _ 5 O lt 5 Touch Exit Additional Copy Operations C350 6 13 Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations 6 6 7 Setting the Enlarged Display Clear Check Function Accessibili
217. inals selected touch the key for the paper drawer loaded with the paper to be used 6 Touch Enter 7 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again 10 24 C350 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 1 0 Setting the 4in1 Copy Order Function This function is used to specify the copy order during 4in1 copying The default setting is 1 2 1 Press the Utility key Touch User s Choice 2 2 3 Touch 2 3 4 User s Choice 2 Touch 4in1 Copy Order o select paper mall original Yes oO re eN Oo lt 5 Touch the key for the desired setting User s Choice 2 Select default copy order 6 Touch Enter when making copies in mode 7 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen Utility Mode Operations The Basic screen appears again C350 10 25 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions Setting the Centering Function This function is used to specify where the image is positioned when the document is smaller than the paper The default setting is Yes 1 2 Press the Utility key Touch User s Choice 2 Touch 2 3
218. ing copies made while erasing certain areas will not be printed correctly When loading a document with a binding margin position the top of the document toward the rear of this machine For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 Thick Documents Thick Original Setting Select this setting when documents printed on thick paper are loaded into the reverse automatic document feeder To specify a thick document 34 1 4 Ib to 55 3 4 Ib touch Thick Original To specify conditions of the original As the factory default no setting is selected re Condition If the Book Copy setting was selected Original Direction is not available 1 Touch Orig Copy The Original Copy screen appears 2 Touch Original Direction The Original Direction 1 Application screen appears l Ready to copy igina Direction 4 3 42 C350 3 9 Specifying Conditions of the Original 3 3 Touch A below the Select direction of original in Original Direction setting appropriate for the document to be copied and then touch Enter N Hint When copying a double sided document or using a double sided 2in1 or 4in1 Copy setting if the document orientation and document loading direction are not specified the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or with the correct page arrangement 4 Touc
219. ing Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 1 0 Setting Up Volume Track E K C Accounts Volume Track Setting E K C Function This function is used to specify the access number for each account printing permissions and the maximum number of copies allowed R Condition The Volume Track Setting E K C function is available only if the Volume Track Mode E K C function is set to Yes 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code Oo Touch Enter o G _ o 2 O r 4 Touch Volume Track E K C 5 Touch Volume Track Setting E K C The Volume Track Setting E K C screen appears Utility Mode Operations 6 Touch the key for the block containing the desired account o The 998 accounts Volume Track are divided into 20 os blocks with each range indicated on the keys C350 10 93 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 7 Touch and to specify the desired volume number o Touch 10 and 10 to increase or decrease by 10 the volume number that is selected Yelume Track une Nunber by using A V Key and inp t i Key Pad
220. ing Photo Density Settings on page 3 44 C350 xix Available Features Copying a document containing various page sizes A document with various page sizes can be scanned and copied together For details refer to Copying Documents of Mixed Sizes Mixed Original Function on page 6 3 Printing a sample copy Before printing a large number of copies a sample copy can be printed so that it can be checked For details refer to Printing Sample Copies Copy 1 Set Function on page 6 6 Interrupting a copy job The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy job to be printed For details refer to Interrupting a Copy Job Interrupt Mode on page 6 8 Enlarging the touch panel screens The touch panel screens can be enlarged in order to simplify the operations for making copies For details refer to Enlarge Display Mode User s Guide Checking the copy settings Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed From these screens the copy settings can also be changed For details refer to Checking the Settings on page 6 16 Storing the scanned image in the memory The scanned document can be stored in the memory and deleted only when it is printed For details refer to Storing the Scanned Image in the Memory Scan to Memory Function on page 7 2 XX C350 Available Features Scanning the document in separa
221. ing on where the misfeed occurs Determine the misfeed location by looking at the illustration displayed with the error message and then clear the misfeed according to the appropriate procedure 11 20 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 1 1 Locations of Paper Misfeeds in the Enlarge Display Mode If a paper misfeed occurs the screen shown below appears Misfeed detected Remove misfeed at ALTA Misfeed detected Remove misfeed at O C350 11 21 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications G 2 3 N OV j O N BE eA 7 Cy7 4 E SA 5 J 5 11 Ms ra Y ery 12 O a 9 O 5 H 10 O 6 6 O Message Description Message Description 1 A paper misfeed in the reverse 7 A staple jam in the finisher FS 501 automatic document feeder p 11 50 p 11 37 2 A paper misfeed in the fusing area 8 A paper misfeed in the automatic p 11 33 duplex unit p 11 25 3 A paper misfeed in the right side 9 A paper misfeed in the 1st
222. inistrator mode available from the Utility mode Settings should be specified by the administrator O Settings cannot be specified by anyone who does not log in using the administrator access number O For details on administrator access numbers contact the authorized service representative Nes Reference For details on specifying settings for managing accounts refer to Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions on page 10 89 To make copies when accounts are specified N Additional Information Ifaccounts have been specified a screen appears indicating that the volume number and its access number must be entered 1 Using the keypad type in the volume number Input Volume Number and Access Number aes using the numerical Key Pad and its 8 digit access number 6 10 C350 6 5 Making Copies With an Account 2 Press the Access key The access number input screen disappears and the Basic screen appears 3 Make copies using the desired copy settings 4 When you are finished making copies press the Access key The access number input screen appears again C350 Ke _ 7 o lt Additional Copy Operations Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations 6 6 6 Setting the Key Repeat Start Interval Function Accessibility Mode 6 6 Setting the Key Repeat Start Interval Function Accessibility Mode The length of time unt
223. int 11 21 Waitin Beaker 11 22 Basic screen touch Basic select the job and then touch Delete CR C No 3 1 000 pura Print 11 16 AN sere ing A Active Mode Print S Delete five e i KEPS Pr Select a listed job to view its setting details Touch Next to view the next screen showing additional details of the job The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 User name Displays the type source of the job COPIER is displayed for copy jobs 4 Status Displays the status of the job 5 Job end Displays the time when printing of the job is expected to be finished C350 8 7 o _ 5 2 O al Managing Jobs Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 8 2 Job Log Screens Print Log Screen Touch Print Log The Print Log screen containing the list of printed jobs appears In addition the jobs can be divided into separate lists of those that have finished being printed and those that have been deleted To view a list of completed print jobs touch Finished Jobs To view a list of jobs that have been deleted after being queued touch Deleted Jobs To return to the Basic
224. ir Functions Outside of Machine 7 Copy output tray 6 Front door 5 1st drawer 4 2nd drawer Z SEE 1 Right side door 2 Multiple bypass tray 3 Power switch The illustration above shows the reverse automatic document feeder and large capacity paper feed cabinet installed No Part Name Description 1 Right side door Opened when clearing misfeeds 2 Multiple bypass tray Used when printing onto paper with a size not loaded into a paper drawer or onto thick paper overhead projector transparencies postcards envelopes or label sheets Holds up to 150 sheets of plain paper 20 overhead projector transparencies postcards label sheets or sheets of thick paper or 10 envelopes Referred to as the bypass tray throughout the manual See p 2 35 3 Power switch Used to turn the machine on and off See p 2 17 4 2nd drawer Holds up to 500 sheets of paper See p 2 31 5 1st drawer Holds up to 250 sheets of paper The paper size can be adjusted freely Media other than plain paper can be loaded See p 4 8 6 Front door Opened when replacing a toner cartridge See p 11 2 7 Copy output tray Collects printed pages C350 2 5 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions 8 Reverse automatic document feeder 9 Document scales 10 Media type selection dial Envelop
225. is function to Yes allows you to disable the Sleep mode completely using the No function available through the User s Choice 1 screen R Reference For details on the Sleep mode refer to Turning the Machine On and Off on page 2 17 For details on the User s Choice functions refer to Setting the Sleep Function on page 10 13 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch Disable Sleep F Admin Set Mode Over S t ize Paper election 12x18 SI R volume Track ECE K C gt Error No No 10 34 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 6 Touch the key for the desired setting 7 Touch Enter 8 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again Admin Set Choose to enable Yes or disable No Sleep Mode Enter Setting the Over Size Paper Selection Function This function is used to set the paper size for over size paper The default setting is 12 x 18 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch Over
226. is only available if the optional hard disk HD 501 is installed For details refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide 5 Scan key Press to enter Scan mode While the machine is in Scan mode the indicator on the Scan key lights up in green For details on the Scan mode refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide 6 Copy key Press to enter Copy mode As a default the machine is in Copy mode While the machine is in Copy mode the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green 7 Power Save key Press to enter Power Save mode While the machine is in Power Save mode the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off To cancel Power Save mode press the Power Save key again 8 Access key If Copy Track mode has been set press this key after entering the account number and access code in order to use this machine 9 Interrupt key Press to enter Interrupt mode While the machine is in Interrupt mode the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and the message Now in Interrupt mode appears on the touch panel To cancel Interrupt mode press the Interrupt key again 10 Reset key Press to clear all settings except programmed settings entered in the control panel and touch panel C350 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions 2 No Part Name Description 11 C clear
227. it Access Number using nunel 1 Allowances Black Permit Color Permit Scan Permit Access Upper Limit Copy Print 8 Specify the 8 digit access number for the desired account O The access number can be set between 00000001 and 99999998 9 Using the keypad type in the access number O If the access code has been entered incorrectly press the C clear key to erase the entered code and then use the keypad to enter the correct access number 10 Touch Allowances The Allowance screen appears 11 Specify the desired setting beside Color and Black under Copy Print and Select area you wish to change and Chan setting select For All Volumes Volume Track Setti Ee To Set same setting for all So l mes beside Scan Allowance GOPZ t Volume Number Color IC Black 10 94 C350 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 1 0 N Additional Information If the Color parameter is set to Prohibit full color 2 color and monocolor printing are not possible In addition the Auto Color Full Color 2 Color and Single Color Color settings from the Basic screen are also not available Ifthe Black parameter is set to Prohibit black and white printing is not possible In addition the Auto Color and Black Color set
228. ity Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings Setting the Date 8 Time Setting Function This function is used to specify the current date and time In addition the time zone can be set between 1200 and 1200 in 30 minute intervals The default setting is 0000 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 3 4 6 Touch Date amp Time Setting TO Admin Set Administrator Code Change 7 Touch Year Admin Set Input current date and time using the 10 Keypad Press Enter after each entry 8 Press the C clear key The currently specified value is erased 10 48 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 1 0 9 Using the keypad enter the current year 10 Repeat the above steps to specify the Month Day Hour min and Time Zone settings o Touch Time Zone before touching R Additional Information The time zone appears as a time difference from Greenwich Mean Time 11 Touch Enter o To return to the Admin Set screen touch Cancel The clock starts 12 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again C350 10 49 Chapter 10 Utility Mode
229. ivate HDD Lock appears D Admin Set The password is changed Note Please turn the main switch of the copier OFF ON Nev word to activate HDD Lock Do not forget the password ROKK Ret e Neu B sauord XEKKKKKA 12 As instructed turn the machine off then on again The new password is registered A Reminder Be sure to keep the specified password in a safe place so that it will not be lost The currently specified password will be needed when removing the lock setting for the hard disk 10 56 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 Removing the Lock Setting for the Hard Disk By selecting the HDD Lock function when the hard disk is already locked the password can be changed or the lock setting for the hard disk can be removed Follow the procedure described below to remove the lock setting for the hard disk 1 2 Press the Utility key Touch Admin Mode Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter Touch Admin Set Touch 3 4 Touch HDD Lock 0O Admin Set Reprint Administrator Code i Change Touch Disable 0O Admin Set Touch Enter Change HDD Lock setting Using the keyboard that HDD Lock appears on the screen
230. izes Paper of a non standard shape not rectangular Paper that is bound with glue staples or paper clips Paper with labels attached Paper with ribbons hooks buttons etc attached C350 4 5 Chapter 4 Copy Paper Chapter 4 Copy Paper 4 4 2 Paper Storage 4 2 Paper Storage Observe the following precautions when storing the paper e Store the paper in a location that meets the following requirements O Not exposed to direct sunlight O Not exposed to a flame O Not exposed to high humidity O Not extremely dusty e Unwrapped paper should be placed in a plastic bag and stored in a cool dark location e Keep paper out of the reach of children 4 6 C350 4 3 Automatically Selecting the Paper Source 4 4 3 Automatically Selecting the Paper Source If the selected paper drawer runs out of paper while a copy job is being printed and a different paper drawer is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions the other paper drawer is automatically selected so printing can continue If the optional large capacity paper feed cabinet is installed a maximum of 3 250 copies with Letter C paper can be made continuously Operating Conditions e The paper is the same size e The paper is the same type e The paper is positioned in the same orientation When making a large number of copies continuously load all paper drawers with paper meeting the conditions listed above Order for Selecting Another Paper Drawer
231. jajajajojojajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojojojojajojajojajajajajojojajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojojojojajojajojajajajajojojajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojojojojajojajojajajajajojojajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojajojajojajajajajojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj j jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofjojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofjojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofjojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojoJojoJoOjoJojojojo v v wv wv w wv v ojojojojo ojojojwy ojojojvyj w o o o v v v O o O v v v v gt gt gt gt gt o o o ojojojojojo ojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojo w ojojojojojojojojojojojo w w ojojojojojofojoJojoJojo v v w ojojojojojojojojojojojojojo w ojojojojojojojojojojojojojo w vjo Setting selected later gt 1 No of copies 2 Reverse Automatic Document Feeder 3 Manual feeding 4 Auto Color ACS 5 Full Color 6 2 Color 7 Black 8 Auto Paper Select APS 9 1st drawer 1814 pojoojas Sumos o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
232. jajojajajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoja jajajojaj ja ja ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo v ojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo vjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofojojojojofjojojojojofjojo v jojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojofojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj ojo ojojojojo ojojojojo ojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo vjojojojojojojojoj ojoj ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj ojojojojo jo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj jojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj ojoj ojojojojoj ojojojojoj ojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o v o v o o o o o Setting selected later say parejas Gumes 49 Single sided copy 50 Double sided copy
233. k gt Posi Genter ogtaple if Expert User Mode Black Image Densit Correction Lighter Std Choose the density of black image Darker las C350 10 77 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions Setting the Stabilizer Function If the image is incorrect even after the gradation levels have been adjusted set the Stabilizer function N Reference For details on adjusting the gradation levels refer to Setting the Gradation Adjustment Function on page 10 67 There are two Stabilizer settings e Reset and Stabilize mode e Stabilize mode N Condition Image stabilization is basically performed based on past data up to the previous session Normally the Stabilizer function is set to Stabilize Select Reset and Stabilize only if the desired effect cannot be attained with the Stabilize 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Expert User Mode 5 Touch Stabilizer if we Expert User Mode yok Paper and an Film Im De Color Pitt Correctio Color Shift Center Staple Cor
234. key for the output tray that you wish to assign to each application 6 Touch Enter 7 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again User s Choice 2 Choose output tray for different modes Internet Print Copy Enter 10 28 C350 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 10 Setting the Priority Device Function This function is used to specify the print timing for print jobs that are received The default setting is Printer R Additional Information If Copier is selected the print jobs are queued as a job after the data for all pages are received then printing begins If Printer is selected the operation is gueued as a job when the data for the first page is received then printing begins 1 Press the Utility key Touch User s Choice 2 Touch 3 3 A O N Touch Priority Device 5 Touch the key for the desired setting 6 Touch Enter 7 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again User s Choice 2 Printer Priority Device User s Choice 2 Selected device function will be given priorit Priority Device C350 10 29
235. king Basic Copies 2 Specify the necessary settings O To specify a Color setting touch Color For details refer to Selecting a Color Setting on page 3 5 To specify a Output setting touch Output For details refer to Selecting Output Settings on page 3 8 To specify a Zoom setting touch Zoom For details refer to Specifying a Zoom Setting on page 3 13 To specify the Paper Size setting touch Paper Size For details refer to Selecting a Paper Size Setting on page 3 18 To specify the Original and Copy settings touch Orig Copy For details refer to Selecting Original Settings on page 3 27 and Selecting Copy Settings on page 3 32 To specify Photo Density settings touch Photo Density For details refer to Selecting Photo Density Settings on page 3 44 Paper Size GRD SSS TESSIE ESETEIT Drig Copy PsaassesvesvassessTesTUsUSVOUSUUSTUSTOTTOSSUOT TT Density C350 XV Making Basic Copies o To specify settings for the Application functions touch Application For details refer to Application Functions on page TA CC pam 3 Check the setting for the number of copies Reference For details refer to Specifying the Number of Copies on page 3 2 4 Press the Start key xvi C350 Available Features Available Features Selecting the print color The color used to print co
236. l document sizes Ready to copy O Select the Photo Size appropriate 7 m BPO B st k document size and then touch Enter o _ D O lt 10 To specify a photo size or a non standard size touch Photo Size or Custom Size O Selecta photo size or touch X and Y Ready b0 copy and touch and to the size of the Be original and then Photo Size touch Enter ect Custom Size Basic Copy Operations 11 Touch Enter The Book Copy screen appears again R Hint To cancel the function touch Cancel in the Frame Center Erase screen 12 Touch Enter The Original Copy screen appears again C350 3 31 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings 3 8 Selecting Copy Settings The desired type of copy can be selected For details on specifying the type of original refer to Selecting Original Settings on page 3 27 Ready to copy The following Copy settings are available N Condition Double sided 2 setting double sided 2in1 2 2in1 setting double sided 4in1 2 4in1 setting and booklet Booklet setting copying are only available if the optional automatic duplex unit is installed Booklet binding Bind setting and center erasing Center Erase setting are
237. l off C350 1 11 Chapter 1 Installation and Operation Precautions 1 3 Operation Precautions Jaydeup suonnesaid vonelado pue uonelyeisuy C350 1 12 Before Making Copies Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 1 Components and Their Functions 2 1 Components and Their Functions 9 Job Separator gt 1 Reverse Automatic Document Feeder 2 Original Cover EA 3 Automatic Duplex Unit A 10 Main unit 8 Finisher 16 Image Controller FS 501 a lle 7 Finisher FS 601 4 Desk 5 Single double Paper Feed Cabinet 6 Large capacity Paper Feed Cabinet No Part Name Description 1 Reverse Automatic Automatically feeds one document sheet at a time for Document Feeder DF 601 optional scanning and automatically turns over double sided documents for scanning Referred to as the reverse automatic document feeder throughout the manual Original Cover OC 501 optional Presses down on the loaded document to keep it in place Referred to as the original cover throughout the manual Automatic Duplex Unit AD 501 optional Turns over printed pages allowing double sided pages to be printed automatically e If image controller IC 401 and the automatic duplex unit are installed the memory must be expanded If the optional expanded memory unit is not installed automatic d
238. l the finisher the main unit must be installed on the desk on the large capacity paper feed cabinet or on the single paper feed cabinet or the double paper feed cabinet Finisher FS 501 optional Finishes printed pages according to the selected Output setting sorting or stapling then feeds out the pages e In order to install the finisher the main unit must be installed on the desk on the large capacity paper feed cabinet or on the single paper feed cabinet or the double paper feed cabinet Job Separator JS 601 optional If finisher FS 501 is installed the number of copy output trays can be increased Referred to as the job separator throughout the manual Main unit The document is scanned by the scanner section and the scanned image is printed by the printer section Referred to as the main unit throughout the manual Punch Kit PK 501 optional Allows hole punching to be used if installed onto finisher FS 601 Referred to as the punch kit throughout the manual Expanded Memory Unit EM 301 optional Increases the memory of the machine to 512 MB 256 MB standard memory 256 MB expanded memory unit By expanding the memory the number of pages that can be stored in the memory can be increased Referred to as the expanded memory unit throughout the manual Hard Disk HD 501 optional Allows more pages to be stored In addition by installing Hard Disk HD
239. le Punch gt gt 2 Staples Turn 2 the C350 14 13 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications Left Bound Double Sided Document p Single 2in1 Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen Corner gt Staple 1 2 puro 3 4 pada T gt 1 2 rum 34 the page Hole gt Punch 1 2 Turn 3 4 2 Staples Original Direction the i Crosswise ims Hole Punch 2 Staples o o gt 1 2 Turn 3 4 he page Corner 7 gt Staple 1 Tum 3 Cae 4 7 gt 1 jum 3 ti 2 page 4 Hole 1 gt Y 3 Punch Original Direction 7 ia ri 2 Staples Lengthwise page 7 Hole Punch 2 Staples 0 6 gt 1 Tan 3 2 pada 4 14 14 C350 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 14 Left Bound Double Sided Document Single 4in1 Copy Origin
240. lected according to the priority order C350 14 33 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 3 Function Combination Table 14 34 C350 Index Index Chapter 15 Chapter 15 Index 1 B 15 1 Index 15 1 Index A COPY tutti rio Mat 3 33 1 Grigin l cari ata 3 27 1 2in1 G0pY vencio A t ta 3 33 W411 COPY skatas ea aang t s Gada Aa as s 3 34 IstidraWer cui gadi A aa JM ei ada 2 26 3 22 2 COpy d ki sd da 3 33 2 Original tairas us peer cre eee cece iia 3 27 2160101 zodu ties onde Hay end sd ad lo 3 5 2 211 COPY aeniei ah BAe das ts 3 33 2 4in IR COPY its V Ls A asai 3 34 id zilais Mali e MR E D e 2 aaa 10 17 2nd kodi basa gatis rise 2 31 2 POlnt staPl za ats ktas aaa 3 10 Sfd dr W l te gdiuu du aaa 2 31 O 10 17 AI Copy Order ici EEE 10 25 o A 2 31 ACCESS lO ita adas 10 40 Accounts ACS judgement level adjust oooooccccccinccionacacccnncnnanncnnccnnrnannnrnnnnnno 10 18 Active JODS SCrOON cuidas 8 4 Add Pretix Suntixe cod iaa ita 10 63 Administrator cusco dar s RI aa 10 59 Administrator code change cceesceeesseeeseeeeeeeneeeseaeeeeenneetesneetenaeees 10 59 Administrator mode ocoocccinocccnnonccononnnononcnnnnro no nano nn nonn nn nn n nn adriaan 10 31 Auto Col ice io di 3 5 Auto color judgement level add 10 18 Auto paper select cocci n ii dai pair 3 18 Auto reset Mode cit Li des 10 15 AUTO ZOOM end 3 13 Automatic d
241. lection in the touch panel C350 9 15 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions Supplies and Parts 2 Image transfer belt unit 3 Image transfer roller unit 4 Waste toner i i bottle 5 Fusing unit 6 Dust remover 7 LED cleaning 8 Toner tool cartridge 9 Ozone filter 10 Filter No Part Name Description 1 Imaging unit Generates the copy image 2 Image transfer belt unit Layers onto the image transfer belt each of the single colors of the image generated by the imaging unit in order to create a full color image 3 Image transfer roller unit Transfers onto the paper a full color image generated by the image transfer belt unit 4 Waste toner bottle Collects waste toner 5 Fusing unit Fuses the transferred toner to the paper 6 Dust remover Collects the dust generated in the machine 7 LED cleaning tool Used to clean the surface of the LED unit for example when replacing the image transfer belt unit 8 Toner cartridge There are four toner cartridges cyan C magenta M yellow Y and black Bk The combination of the four toners generates full color images 9 Ozone filter Collects the ozone generated in the machine 10 Filter Collects the toner dust generated in the machine 2 16 C350 2 3 Turning the Machine On and Off 2 3 Turning the Machine On and Off Turning On the Machine
242. limit E K C job o c eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeas 10 39 Key repeat Start Interval o eeeeeecceeseeseeteeeeeeeeeseeteaeeeeeseaeeseaeeeaeeeaes 6 12 15 6 C350 15 1 Index 15 Language Select acond ii EDAP search iii i ce Lodi it Muh kada eae eet Left Bound double sided documents iii Loading sist Gs ia Loading documents for specific applications Locked job del t voca iria c beds Locked job SCreen visi ra cl A ej Maini Unit vrs Arete Seti ead a A 13 2 Malt nction s cv ts sek da i adn aos 11 64 12 5 Manual feeling cid Ganladearcueenanse 2 44 Manual paper selection idea 3 18 Manual Z00M ii 3 14 Manual zoom rati0 vicooiici arar int ira rin opone NR send RARAS 3 15 Manual zoom setting oooonncccnnncccononccononcncnaranonarrnnnnorn cnn rnrr rana 3 14 Marlin Renee ed e ee ei eee 3 41 7 8 Media type selection dial 0 eeeeeseeeeeneeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneereneeeeeneeeees 2 26 Memo0fY verdes aia 8 12 Messages uri aioe ALK ea 11 1 11 70 Minimal 2uotasur canoa iio ri 3 13 3 15 Mirror in d ita lid Need eat dee 7 51 Misfeeds 11 20 11 23 11 25 11 26 11 28 11 29 11 33 11 37 11 41 11 46 Mixed original detection oocooocccononicononocononcnnnoncncnnrnnorano cnn nar ncnnnrnnnnn nos 6 3 Mode check it iad HRA RE li A ee 6 16 Multi Page Enlargement eeeeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeesneeeseneeeeeeateeeeneeeeeneeees 7 45 Multiple bypass tray oooocccononcccnoccnonancnnnancncnnrnno
243. llation and Operation Precautions Chapter 1 Installation and Operation Precautions 1 1 2 Installation Precautions Space Requirements To ensure easy machine operation supply replacement and maintenance adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below 49 1 4 16 172 28 3 4 4 82 1 2 CN e gt lt V Mo 11 1 4 59 1 4 2 1 4 7 as gt gt y EA i y LE E 5 i V 60 45 3 4 PRSE l 2 per SN S I A a Cc q t gH 4 rip i la Sea a S 34 2 I Unit inch N Reminder Be sure to allow a clearance of 4 in or more at the back of the machine for the ventilation duct 1 8 C350 1 3 Operation Precautions 1 1 3 Operation Precautions Operating Environment The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as follows e Temperature 50 F 10 C to 86 F 30 C with fluctuations of no more than 50 F 10 C within an hour Humidity 15 to 85 with fluctuations of no more than 20 within an hour Proper Use To ensure the optimum performance of the machine follow the precautions listed below Never place heavy objects on the original glass or subject it to shocks Never open any ma
244. lly recalled when a 2in1 4in1 or Booklet setting is selected The default setting is Preset 1 2 Press the Utility key Touch User s Choice 2 Touch 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom Touch the key for the desired setting Touch Enter Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again User s Choice 2 Language Select English i ao CI Booklet COJ zoom Preset AES a Level Adjustment 4 Dis Intelligent Sorting Criss Cross Yes Yes User s Choice 2 In Gi zoom ratio can be preset x0 500 Em 210 647 qm or Booklet Mode the default am cm Booklet Book let C350 10 17 oO ia eN oO lt Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions Setting the ACS Judgement Level Adjustment Function This function is used to adjust the level for detecting a color or black and white document with the Auto Color setting The detection level can be adjusted to one of 5 settings The default setting is 3 Std 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch User s Choice 2 3 Touch ACS Judgement Level Adjustment 4 Touch
245. m 10 If the left margin for the second side is less than 2 5 mm touch to specify the desired positive adjustment between 0 1 mm and 3 0 mm 11 Ifthe left margin for the second side is more than 3 5 mm touch to specify the desired negative adjustment between 0 1 mm and 3 0 mm 12 Press the Start key The adjusted test pattern is printed on 11 x 17 size paper 13 Check the print result Make sure that the left margin for the second side is adjusted to between 2 5 mm and 3 5 mm O lfmore adjustment is necessary return to step 10 and repeat the adjustment procedure 14 Touch Enter 15 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The main screen appears again C350 10 85 o MES _ 5 2 O al Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions Setting the Center Staple Position Function This function is used to make fine adjustments to the center stapling position and the folding position when binding The default setting is O mm Before making the adjustment use the Booklet and Bind settings to make a copy sample Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created N Reference For details on the Booklet and Bind setting refer to Selecting Copy Settings on page 3 32 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad
246. me Erase Function 7 5 Erasing Sections of Copies Edge Frame Erase Function Areas such as the unclean looking frames around copies can be erased The following locations for erasing the edge frame of the document are available Select the erasing location suitable for the document Setting Copy Position Description copy Copies are printed with the left side of the document erased Al A document copy sashes are printed with the top of the document AS AAA ey as a ae document copy Copies are printed with a frame around the document erased 7 10 C350 7 5 Erasing Sections of Copies Edge Frame Erase Function 7 To use the Edge Frame Erase function 1 Position the document s to be copied N Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 N o a ok 99 E 0 2 Touch Application The Application screen appears Application Functions 3 Touch Edge Frame Erase Ready to copy Density pplication color Image Adjustment Creation 4 Select the desired area IF the original s text ight iti to SRTGENAL S upri osition go to to be erased DIRECTION to Sev the Correct text 5 Touch L and L to specify the width of the area to be erased Position C350 7 11 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 5 Erasing S
247. ments that have been scanned 4 Misfeed clearing cover Opened when clearing a misfed document Automatic Duplex Unit No Part Name Description 5 Automatic duplex unit door Opened when clearing a paper misfeed within the automatic duplex unit 2 8 C350 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions Single Paper Feed Cabinet No Part Name Description 6 Right side door release lever Used when clearing paper misfeeds 7 3rd drawer Holds up to 500 sheets of paper 8 Storage drawer Can be used to store paper Double Paper Feed Cabinet No Part Name Description 6 Right side door release lever Used when clearing paper misfeeds 7 3rd drawer Each holds up to 500 sheets of paper 8 Finisher FS 601 4th drawer No Part Name Description 9 Lower paper output tray Collects copies that were bound bound paper tray 10 Front door Opened when replacing the staple cartridge 11 Paper output tray Collects copies elevated tray 12 Upper door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 13 Feed guide Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 14 Transport guide Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher C350 2 9 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 Part Names and Their Functions 22 Upper cover 21 Primary pa A per output tray _ D Q lt O 20 Secondary paper 0 output tray O o O
248. mple Copies Copy 1 Set Function 6 3 Printing Sample Copies Copy 1 Set Function Before printing a large number of copies a sample copy can be printed so that it can be checked This allows copy errors to be corrected before a large number of copies are printed R Additional Information Ifa job is currently being printed that job is interrupted so that a sample copy can be printed After the single sample copy is printed the interrupted job automatically continues printing To make a sample copy 1 Select the desired copy settings 2 Touch Basic andthen touch Copy 1 Set Ready to copy 3 Press the Start key Only one sample copy is printed 4 Check the sample copy o To print the remaining number of copies with the current settings touch Yes da Do you want to print all the rest The copy job is queued for printing the remaining number of copies Please wait 6 6 C350 6 3 Printing Sample Copies Copy 1 Set Function O If the remaining number of copies cannot be printed with the current Job has been done improperly settings touch No Check the log The remaining number of copies for the job are erased The message Job has been done improperly Check the log appears 5 Touch Enter C350 Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations
249. n 7 Close the upper door 8 Remove all paper fed into the paper output tray 9 Open the feed guide for the finisher and then remove any misfed paper 11 48 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 1 1 10 Open the transport guide and then pull out any misfed paper in the transport section R Reminder If the paper cannot easily be pulled out stop trying to pull it out and continue with to step 11 Pulling out the paper with too much force may damage the folding unit 11 If the paper could not be removed in step 10 turn the misfeed clearing dial in the folding section clockwise Feed the paper into the lower paper output tray and then pull it out 12 Close the front door of the finisher R Reminder Be careful that your fingers are not pinched when the front door is closed 13 Slide the finisher back against the machine C350 11 49 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears 11 5 When the Message Staple mode cannot be used Appears Clearing Jammed Staples in Finisher FS 501 R Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine T LI ES
250. n and then after the machine has finished warming up it is ready to begin printing Sleep Mode If no operation is performed for the specified length of time it automatically enters Sleep mode As the factory default the machine enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes The length of time after the last operation until the machine enters Sleep mode can be specified using the Sleep function on the User s Choice 1 screen For details refer to Setting the Sleep Function on page 10 13 Recovering From Sleep Mode 1 Press the Start key The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key on the operation panel or by touching the touch panel 2 The touch panel comes on again and then after the machine has finished warming up it is ready to begin printing after about 99 seconds at normal room temperature 73 4 F C350 2 19 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 3 Turning the Machine On and Off Turning Off the Machine 1 Touch Job Log to check that no jobs are queued 2 If any copies or printouts remain in the output tray remove them 3 Set the power switch to 0 R Reminder Do not turn off the machine while it is making copies or printing otherwise a paper misfeed may occur Do not turn off the machine while it is scanning or sending or receiving data otherwise all scanned data or transmission data will be deleted Do n
251. n be initialized For details refer to Clearing Volume Track Data E K C Counters on page 10 102 C350 10 99 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions Printing Volume Track Data E K C Counters The counters for each account can be printed ie Condition The Volume Track Data E K C function is available only if the Volume Track Mode E K C function is set to Yes 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Volume Track E K C 5 Touch Volume Track Data E K C The Volume Track Data E K C screen appears Settin COI TSK bala i CE K C 6 Touch Print Volume Track Data lt E K C Enter 10 100 C350 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 10 7 Load 11 x 17 size paper into the 1st drawer and then press the Start key The icon Ed showing that data is being transmitted appears in the job display F Volume Track O CE KC Press START to print Volume Track Data Place paper 11 x 17 in Tray 1 8 The job is queued for pri
252. nd then touch E nte r Administrator Code Change Current Administ o If Cancel is UEN gt touched the administrator code is not changed The screen shown in step 6 appears again C350 10 59 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings 8 Type in the new administrator code and es then touch Enter Enter the new Administrator Code Admin Set The Retype New ini Cade Change Code box appears Current Administrator Code 9 Type in the new administrator code New Adainistrator Code again and then touch N Enter The new administrator code is registered 10 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 10 60 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 1 0 Setting the Panel Reset Timer Function This function is used to specify the length of time after the last operation until all functions automatically return to their default settings The default setting is 1 min R Reference For details refer to Turning the Machine On and Off on page 2 17 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code Oo Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 4 4 Admin Set
253. nd white copies e Copy Size Total number of black and white copies on paper specified as large sized paper e Printer Total Total number of black and white printouts e Printer Size Total number of black and white printouts on paper specified as large sized paper e Copy Printer Total number of black and white copies and printouts Full Color counters e Copy Total Total number of full color copies e Copy Size Total number of full color copies on paper specified as large sized paper e Printer Total Total number of full color printouts e Printer Size Total number of full color printouts on paper specified as large sized paper e Copy Printer Total number of full color copies and printouts 1 amp 2 Color counters Single Color e Copy Total Total number of monotone copies Copy Size Total number of monotone copies on paper specified as large sized paper 2 Color Copy Total Total number of 2 color copies Copy Size Total number of 2 color copies on paper specified as large sized paper e Printer Total Total number of 2 color printouts 10 8 C350 10 3 Viewing Counters Counter List Function 10 paper 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Counter List 3 Touch the key for the desired color type The counters are displayed N Additional Information To print the list of counters touch Print and then press the Start key The list of counters is printed in English P
254. new toner cartridge O Check that the color of the 4 Shake the new toner cartridge well toner in the cartridge is the same color as the toner cartridge securing lever V Reminder Do not install the toner cartridge of a color different than the one that was removed otherwise the machine may be damaged R Condition Desiccant is attached to the black toner cartridge Be sure to remove the desiccant before installing the toner cartridge into the machine Desiccant A Reminder The toner within the toner cartridge may have become compacted If it has be sure to shake the toner cartridge until the toner is mostly broken up before installing the cartridge C350 11 2 When the Message Replace the Toner cartridge Appears 5 Peel off the tape and then remove the protective cap N Reminder Slowly remove the tape attached to the toner cartridge If the tape is removed with too much force toner may spurt out 6 Position the toner cartridge as shown and then insert it into its compartment 7 Swing the toner cartridge securing lever up clockwise R Reminder Make sure that the toner cartridge securing lever is fully swung up as shown otherwise the front door cannot be closed C350 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 2 When the Message Replace the Toner cart
255. ng printed can be interrupted printing is interrupted and printing of the unlocked job begins Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job that printing was interrupted for is finished If the job currently being printed cannot be interrupted printing is interrupted after printing for the current job is finished 8 14 C350 8 3 Job Control Screens 8 Increase Priority Screen Touch Increase Priority The Increase Priority screen containing the list of jobs waiting to be printed or stored in the memory appears Queued jobs can be prioritized so that they will be printed before other jobs To return to the Basic screen touch Basic To delete a job select the job and then touch Delete ta Basic PR Name Status Dest File Name Orig Copy tart na Select the job to prioritize StBrea Elev 1 5 16 18 Job Storea Elev Job Storea Elev beete hora sov boest Efes woo Reprint The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 User name Displays the type source of the job COPIER is displayed for copy jobs 4 Status Displays the status of the
256. nncnonncnnano conan cnn nan ncnnn nn 7 39 Editing Images Creation Functions aa aaa 7 40 To make settings for the Background Color function 7 40 To make settings for the Color Separation function 7 42 To set the Neg Pos Reverse function 7 44 To make settings for the Multi Page Enlargement function 7 45 To make settings for the Mirror Image function 7 51 viii C350 Reducing the Document to Postcard Size and Printing Multiple Copies on One Page Postcard Function 7 54 To make settings for the Postcard function 7 54 Changing the Copy Settings for a Queued JoD eee 8 3 Deleting a Queued JOb ooonocoocccnccccoccconccnoncnancnonanonnncnnna nana cannnnns 8 3 Canceling a Job Being Printed ooocnnnccnicicicccincacanccnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 8 3 8 2 Job Log Screens ooonoocnniccnncnnnacennno nseries 8 4 Active Jobs Scree neie a a aE aa aaa a 8 4 Active Scan SCOE r a a a a aa a a E EARE 8 6 Mode Check SCreen cecccescessseeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeseaeeeseeeeaeeseeseaeeeaaes 8 7 PrintiLog Scroll iemdijis 8 8 Scam Log Scream ala da 8 10 8 3 Job Control Screens aaa 8 11 Flold Job Scree sis did sms aladas 8 11 To print stored data iiid aaa 8 12 Locked Jobs Screen 8 13 To print a locked job sdass sers 8 14 Increase Priority Screen di as 8 15 To increase the print priority of
257. nnnrnnnnonn nana 2 35 3 21 3 25 Multi sheet feeding sest s 2 41 C350 15 7 LO fo Q oO lt Index Chapter 15 Index 1 B 15 1 Index Neg Pos revers encata a 7 44 Non standard paper size oooococcconccononccononcnnnnoncnnnnan nc nano nnnnnncnnns 3 22 3 23 umber of copieS 3 3 coso tacna Kia 3 2 NUMDETINO sitiada tii Ai 7 5 QHP interleave ii tant hottie alate tr ts 7 21 Original direction issie a Aa aE E 2 41 2 44 3 40 Original glass aiton aa 9 2 Original settings secsi ne a a a a 3 27 3 42 Original settings specifying ooonocinnnnnncnnnonnnconncnnonnaccnnncnconcnnnnnnancnnns 3 29 Output settings scrire da ak lll 3 8 Output settings specify oooocncccnncononicoccnonocnnncnnncnnarnnnna aaa 3 12 Over size paper selection ooooconccnnninoccnononoccnnnnncnarnrarn none ee 10 35 Overhead projector transparencies a aaa 2 26 7 21 10 69 Panel tesettimer acti cee sed tigi cates athe cede stila wading kehdnees 2 17 10 61 Pa nai oia 4 2 Paper Capacity luv rito ees 4 4 Paper drawer aia 3 19 11 26 Paper feed cabiliet aae aeaa aa aA aAa EE aaia 2 33 11 28 Paper feed cabinet PC 101 cnococccnconocccccncnnccnannnnnnnonncnnnnnrannn ana nnnn nano 13 5 Paper feed cabinet PC 201 coccncccncccnocccocncnocanancconnnnnnnnnn no rana nana nnnncnnno 13 5 Paper feed cabinet PC 401 oonccccnconocccocncnnccnancconc nono nannncrnnnnnnn nana nnnno 13 5 Paper misfeeds err ee 11 20 11 23 11 2
258. nooncnnnncninnonncnnccnnncanacnnanncnnos 3 13 ZOOMING aa dat in ag sti 3 14 Custom Sizing Manual Zoom Settings 1 aiaa a 3 14 To select a Zoom setting To enter a Manual Zoom ratio To store Manual Zoom TfatiOS oooocoonccccnonicinancncnancnnnnnnnnnnonnnannnnos To recall a stored Manual Zoom ratio 3 16 To specify different vertical and horizontal scaling proportions X Y Zoom SOtINOS ciclista acia testes 3 17 Selecting a Paper Size Setting aaa 3 18 Automatic Paper Selection Auto Paper Select Setting 3 18 Manual Paper Selection oonocncccnnconicccionanocccnnnnnannnonncnrnnnnncnnno 3 18 Bypass Tray Selection Bypass Setting iii 3 18 Bypass Reserve Settings for Bypass Tray oooooccnccciccccocccanncnnns 3 18 To select the paper dra WerT ocooooccnoncccnnonccnnnnncnannnnnnnn cnn nro nannnnos 3 19 To specify the size of the paper in the 1st drawer 3 19 To specify the size of the paper in the bypass tray 3 21 To set a non standard custom paper SiZB oooooccniccnnocicacccnnns 3 22 To store a non standard custom paper SiZB ooocncocinnnnnncccnn 3 23 To select a stored non standard custom paper size 3 24 To specify the Bypass Reserve settings for the bypass tray 3 25 Selecting Original Settings aaa 3 27 Single Sided Original 1 Settidg ooonnccnnnnnnnnnnnncninnonncnnorns 3 27 Double Sided Original 2 Setting
259. nsity settings can be selected for the density of the copy e Each time the Lighter or Darker key is touched the density is lightened or darkened by one level Text Enhancement Setting e Select the desired setting for the reproduction quality of text when copying documents consisting of text that overlaps images such as illustrations or graphs text with a background One of seven density settings can be selected for the text density e Each time Lt 4 is touched the text density is lightened or darkened by one level To emphasize the text on the background touch e To de emphasize the text on the background touch sj C350 3 45 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 10 Selecting Photo Density Settings Glossy Setting Select this setting when copying images with a glossy finish Screen Pattern Settings Select the appropriate setting for reducing moire patterns that occur when copying printed photographs which contain shading or documents containing lines The Screen Pattern settings are available if the Text8 Photo Photo Paper Printed Image or Copied Paper setting is selected O Gradation Select this setting to give the gradation priority o Resolution Select this setting to give the resolution priority To select a Photo Density setting 1 Touch Photo Density The Photo Density screen appears 2 Select the setting appropriate for the
260. nting The Volume Track Data E K C is printed 9 Touch Cancel 10 Touch Enter The Volume Track E K C screen appears again C350 10 101 o G _ o 2 O r Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions Clearing Volume Track Data E K C Counters The counters for the accounts can be cleared ie Condition The Volume Track Data E K C function is available only if the Volume Track Mode E K C function is set to Yes 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Volume Track E K C 5 Touch Volume Track Data E K C The Volume Track Data E K C screen appears Setting PUGLISI hock i CE K C 6 To initialize the Volume Track Data E K C counters for a particular account touch Select Dept Count Reset a Vanitas 10 102 C350 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 10 7 Touch the key for the account that you wish Volume Track O CE KC to initialize the counter To initialize the Volume Track Data E K C Select a Volume and press the Clear key to clear
261. number of copies and printouts made on paper specified as large size paper using all Color settings the Full Color setting the Single Color setting the 2 Color setting and the Black setting e Duplex Copy Counts the total number of double sided copies e Scan Counts the total number of scans Copy e Total Counts the number of copies made using all Color settings the Full Color setting the Single Color setting the 2 Color setting and the Black setting e Large Size Counts the number of copies made on paper specified as large size paper using all Color settings the Full Color setting the Single Color setting the 2 Color setting and the Black setting Print e Total Counts the number of printouts made using all Color settings the Full Color setting the 2 Color setting and the Black setting e Large Size Counts the number of printouts made on paper specified as large size paper using all Color settings the Full Color setting the 2 Color setting and the Black setting mb Press the Utility key N Touch Admin Mode Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter A Touch Volume Track E K C C350 10 97 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 11 Supervising Machine Use Volume Track E K C Functions 5 Touch Volume
262. o Yes Refer to Setting the Criss Cross Function on page 10 20 o _ D O lt Depending on whether the Sort or the Non Sort setting is selected the way that the pages are separated is different as shown below Example When four copies of a four page document are printed Basic Copy Operations Not sorted Sorted C350 3 9 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 4 Selecting Output Settings Stapling with finisher FS 501 installed The copies are bound together with a staple in the corner However the pages can be stapled only if all of the following conditions are met e There are between 2 and 30 pages in the document e f standard size paper is used the paper sizes must be 11 x 17 L Legal L Letter L Letter C Executive L and Executive C e If non standard size paper is used the paper width must be between 7 1 4 in and 11 3 4 in e f non standard size paper is used the paper length must be between 7 1 4 in and 17 in e Copies are printed only on plain paper e If the Mixed Original function is used the copies must be produced with paper of the same width e This machine must not be set to Interrupt mode e The Image Adjustment function on the Application screen is not used Stapling with finisher FS 601 installed The copies are bound together with a staple Eithe
263. o o o o o jo o jo o o o ojo iO eL ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo eno punosByeg wvjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 usu p punoiByoeg ony ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo lene Aysueq 31 ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojoJojoJojoJojojojojojo ooo jojo jojo jojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojoJojojojojojo ooo jojo ojo ojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojoJojojojojojojoJojojojojoJo jojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojoJojojojojojojojojojojojojo jojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojo y jojojojojojojojojojojojofjojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojoJojojojojojo jojojo JojojJoJo jojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojoJojojojojojojoJojojojojoJjo jojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofjojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojajojajojajajajajofojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojojojo jajojajojajajajajojojajajo ojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojojojojajojajojajajajajojojajajo ojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojojojojajojajoja ja j jajojojajajo ojojojojojojojojojojo jajojojojojojojojajojajojajajajajojojajajo ojojojojojojojojojojojajojojojojojojojajojajoja
264. o specify different vertical and horizontal scaling proportions X Y Zoom settings 1 Touch Zoom A screen appears showing the available Zoom settings 2 Touch Manual Zoom 3 Touch X Y Zoom The X Y Zoom screen appears 4 Make sure that X is selected 99 _ D O Ka Input manual zoom ratio using 1 Key Pad OOOO l 5 Using the keypad type in the desired length of side X between x0 250 Enter and x4 000 x0 250 4 000 The entered zoom ratio is displayed x x0 250 4 000 6 Touch Y Basic Copy Operations 7 Using the keypad type in the desired length of side Y between x0 250 and x4 000 The entered zoom ratio is displayed 8 Touch Enter The entered zoom ratio is applied C350 3 17 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting The paper used for making copies can be selected The paper source can be selected in any of the following methods Automatic Paper Selection Auto Paper Select Setting The most appropriate paper size is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified zoom ratio However if the paper in a drawer is specified as special paper the paper in that drawer cannot be selected with the Auto Paper Select setting N Additional Information Ifthe paper in a drawer is specified as special paper
265. oO I1 IJOfoOfJojoO JN fonsejuzjeonpoy ojojojojojojoJojojoJoOJoOJoOJoOJOJOJOJoOJoOjoO lt afafojojolofjoJoOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO OJOJOJOJOJO PJO I IJOJOJOJO 2 fezis ing ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojojo lt ajafojojolojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo je IO 1 jojojojo 2 swy wooz ony ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo lt jojo lt lt jafojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo JO 1 Jofojoj gt Auo pepis ejburs ojajojejolej lt afujojojojojojojojojojojofjojojofjojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojofo JO 1 Jofjojojo R Aueieds ojojojojojojojojojoJoOJoOJoJoOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO PJO I IJOJOJOJO eded neno U6IH ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojolojojojojojofojojojojojojojojojoj jo 1 I1Jofofjojo A sedojenuz ojajojejolojajelejojo lt aj lt fa i fofjof lt ajojafjajajofo lt ajajalajofjojojojojojojojojojojojofjole jo 1 1 jofofojo 2 8 Tano ojajojejolojaja ejojo lt lt a i jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofo JO Jofjojojo 3 2 beps etgnop e sodea zou ojajojejolejajajejojo lt lt lt a jojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo jo jofojojo 5 fe le reded yout o e o o e 6 ojoj lt lt lt 4 1 O0 0j0jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojejoji jojojojo 5 pepis eiqnop z ieded you ojajJojejo 6 ojoj lt ajafjoj1 jojojojojojojojojojoJojojojoJojoJoJoJjojoJojojojojojojojPjo I1 IJofofjojo le ojajojejo 6 ojoja lt 4 0 1j
266. occcnnnnccnnoncnnnonnnons 7 15 Tiling Copy Images Image Repeat Function aaa 7 18 To use the Image Repeat function 000 s 7 18 Inserting Paper Between Transparencies OHP Interleave FUNCtION cceceseeeeesseeesseeeseenseeeeseeeeeees 7 21 To use the OHP Interleave function id 7 21 Making Bound Booklets Booklet Original Function 7 23 To use the Booklet Original fUNCHiON ooonicnncnnnonnnoncnnm 7 23 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters A Gass aaa dd alvas aidas soctesctassecusddesetyensdveteesce 7 26 To adjust the Brightness parameter sseeeeseeeeseeeeeneees 7 26 To adjust the Contrast parameter e cccceeseeeeeseeeeeeeneeees 7 28 To adjust the Saturation parameter cceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 7 29 To adjust the Sharpness parameter eceeeeeeseeeeeeeeteees 7 30 To adjust the Red parameter secesseeesseeeeeeneeeeneeereneees 7 31 To adjust the Green parameter 7 32 To adjust the Blue parameter cceeeeeeseeeeeeneeeesnneereneeees 7 33 To adjust the Color Balance parameter ccceeeeeeeees 7 34 To adjust the Portrait parameter ce ceseeeesseeeeeseeereneees 7 36 To adjust the Hue parameter daa as 7 37 To adjust the Copy Density parameter iaaa aa 7 38 To make sample COPIES c ooocioocccononcccnon
267. ocedure described below to change the password 1 2 Press the Utility key Touch Admin Mode Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter Touch Admin Set Touch 3 4 Touch HDD Lock 0O Admin Set Administrator Code i Change Touch Change Password O Admin Set Change HDD Lock setting HDD Lock Touch Enter Usingthe keyboardthat appears on the screen type in the currently specified password and then touch Enter DS Suora Disable C Pa C350 10 55 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 Type in the new password and then touch Enter O The keypad can also be used to type in the password Oo If Cancel is touched the password is not changed The screen shown in step 6 appears again o To enter uppercase letters touch CAPS O To delete characters that have been entered touch Del The Retype New Password box appears Admin Set Input new password current Password OOK New Password xo PA 11 Type in the new password again and then touch Enter The message Note Please turn the main switch of the copier OFF ON to act
268. oconoconoconoccnoncnoncnonnconancroncc ono nonn no nnc nr ncnnnnnns 5 2 Document Precautions Using the Reverse Automatic Document Feeder ceccceeceseseesceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeaeeseeeeeneeseaees 5 4 Appropriate Document Types Using the Original Glass 5 4 Document Precautions Using the Original Glass 5 5 Small Sized Documents c occocccccccccoccnoncconncnonononn nono ncnn car nnananccnnn 5 5 Centering iia id Ada ee 5 5 5 2 Print Area A O 5 6 6 1 Blocking Document Scan Storage Reprint OFF Function csccseceeeseeesseeeeeesseeeseeeseeeenseeeeeeees 6 2 To set the Reprint OFF fUNCtION eee eeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeeee 6 2 6 2 Copying Documents of Mixed Sizes Mixed Original Function cs ccescseeeesseeseeesseesseeeseeenseeeneeeees 6 3 To copy documents of mixed SIZES aaa 6 4 6 3 Printing Sample Copies Copy 1 Set Function aa as 6 6 To make a sample COPY cccooccconoocccononcnonancnnnannnononono nano nonnnnnnrnnn nn 6 6 6 4 Interrupting a Copy Job Interrupt Mode 6 8 To interrupt COPyiNQ ooccccnoocccnoncncnanoncnnno non nnnn canon o nn rnrn nn n nr nnnnnn nn 6 8 6 5 Making Copies With an Account aaraa een 6 10 Using the Volume Track Mode E K C iiidi a 6 10 To make copies when accounts are specified 6 10 6 6 Setting the Key Repeat Start Interval Function Accessibility Mode csscssessee
269. ocuments loaded crosswise will be copied with the portrait orientation and documents loaded lengthwise will be copied with the landscape orientation Loaded crosswise Portrait orientation fap _ D O lt Loaded lengthwise Landscape orientation N Additional Information Portrait and landscape orientations With the portrait orientation the paper is vertical like with portraits or photos of people Basic Copy Operations With the landscape orientation the paper is horizontal like with landscapes N Hint When copying a double sided document or using a double sided 2in1 or 4in1 Copy setting if the original direction is not specified the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or with the correct page arrangement Document Binding Margin Position Margin Setting If a document with a binding margin is being copied the position of the binding margin can be specified Select the setting appropriate for the binding margin of the document Select this setting if the document is loaded with the binding margin at the left As the factory default this setting is selected C350 3 41 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 9 Specifying Conditions of the Original Select this setting if the document is loaded with the binding margin at the top N Hint If the position of the binding margin for the document is different from that of the selected Margin sett
270. of the paper N Reminder Do not load so many pages that the top of the stack is higher than the Y mark Push the lateral guides firmly up against the edges of the paper Ifthe paper is curled flatten it before loading it C350 2 35 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 9 Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray 8 Additional Information When making manual double sided copies load the paper into the bypass tray so that the second side the blank side faces down The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray S Reminder Do not load more than 20 postcards into the bypass tray Do not load postcards crosswise 2 36 C350 2 9 Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray R Reminder Do not load more than 20 overhead projector transparencies into the bypass tray When loading overhead projector transparencies load them with the longer side as the leading edge as shown Do not load overhead projector transparencies lengthwise C350 2 37 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 9 Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray A Reminder Do not load more than 10 envelopes into the bypass tray Before loading envelopes press them down to make sure that all air is removed and make sure that the
271. ojofojojojojojojojojojojoJoJojojojojo S ireooy wesBoig Ado P O O b ced et ee D D D D ee D D D D D Lt La D D 8 Joios opon oji ijojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojojojojojojojojofojojojojojojojojojojoJoJojojojojo S Buuejueo ojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojofojojojojojojojojojojojojojolojojofojojojojojojojojojo 5 Adoo ajdwes joj joj o jeje i ipifififififififififojejo jofjojojojojojojojojojo oj S isenuoo ojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojofojojojojojojojojojo 8 Asueq Adoo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo 8 eouereg 10109 ojojojojo a afojofojojojojojojojojofojojofojojojojojojojojofjojojojojofojojofojojojojojojojofojo E 5 sseudieus ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo 2 8 sseuysug ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo S 8 luoneimes ojojojojoj lt a lt 0 0 0joj ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo E 5 enH o o o o jo a o ojojojojo o o ojo jojojo jo ojo ojojo jo ojojojojojo o ojojojojojo o o jojo jojo o o 6 8 uosio ojojojojoj lt 4 lt 0joj ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj j
272. ojojojojoj ojojojojojajajajajajajajajojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo O O ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo say pe oejes Bumeg 10 Paper Feed Cabinet 11 Muttiple bypass tray 12 Reservation setting for bypass tray 13 Plain paper double sided 14 Thick paper 1 15 Thick paper 1 double sided 16 Thick paper 2 17 Thick paper 2 double sided 18 Thick paper 3 19 Thick paper 3 double sided 20 OHP 21 Envelopes 22 High Quality Paper 28 Specialty 24 Single Sided Only 25 Auto Zoom 26 Full Size 27 Reduce Enlarge 28 Manual Zoom 29 Manual input 30 X Y Zoom 31 Density level 32 Auto Background density 33 Background level 34 Text 35 Text Photo 36 Map 37 Photo Paper 38 Printed Image 39 Copied Paper 40 Text Enhancement 41 Dot Matrix Original 42 Glossy Mode 43 Single sided original 44 Double sided original 45 Book Copy Separation 46 Book Copy Spread 47 Original Direction 48 Margin 14 25 C350 14 3 Function Combination Table 14 Output 62 young eJoH se de s z aders 1eu109
273. ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo S feng ojojojojoj lt 4 lt 0joj ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo amp peu ojojojojo lt a lt fojofojojojojojojojojojojojofojojojojojojojojoj ofjojojofojojofojojojojojojojojojo 8 venod ojojojojo lt a afojofjojojojojojojojojofojojofjolojojojojojojojojojojojojolojojofojojofjojojofjojofojo R hidnueyul O O O O Y Ijigi g Jueos oresedas ojojojojojojojojofojojojolojojojojofojojofojojojojojojojojofjojofojojofojojofojojojojojojojofojo ESIR reubuo pex o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o jo o o yoe3 uonesedes 10109 fojoj fjo lt fojojojojojofjojojojojofjojo lt fojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojo jojo R Opeja uoneredes 10109 fojoj lt fjofjojojojojojofjojojojojojojo lt fojojojojojojojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojo P jojo E esieney soy ben O O O JOJO d4 OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO 4 OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO JOJOJOJOJOJOJ O R roog punoubyoeg O O O P O P OJOJO OJOJO OJOJOJOJO OJO d4 OJOJO OJOJO OJOJOJO JO OJO JO OJO JOJOJOJO OJOJOJOJOJOJO e R fioo abus ojojoj j ojofjojojojojojojojojojojojofojojojojojojojojojojojojojolojojofojojojojojojojojojo 2 S X rueunsnipy e6eu o ojojojojo fojojofojojojojojojojojojojojojo oJojojojojojofojojojojojoj
274. ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojejoj jojojojo 2 pepis eiqnop seded yous ojajojejolojaja ejojo lt ajafo jofjojojojofjojojofjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo JO Jofjojojo p ieded yous O O O OlO d J O JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJ OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO OJOJO OJO P JO O O O oO 2 pepis eiqnop seded urelg o0j joj joj jeje ej ejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj jojij jojojojo S Aen ssedfg 10 Bumes uonemesey O O o o o o o o o o o o o o e o o o o o ojo ojo o o o o o o o o o o o o o ojo o oj o 1 1 a o o E_n ssedfg ardua ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojejojojojojoj amp jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojejoji j jojojojo 2 2 1eujaeo poog 1odeg ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoJojojojojoJojojojolojojojojoJoJoJojojoJojojojojojo je JO 1 jojojojo jaa arenes Oo o o ojo ojo jojojo o o ojo jo jojojojo o jo jojojojojo jojo jo ojojojojo jojojojojo ojojo b o i I o o oj o Sdv pajas sedeg ony ojojojojojojojojojojojojojo lt jojo afojo lt jofafojojolojojojojoJoJojojoJoJojojojojojo e jo 1 O OJoO e ppeig ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo lt jojo lt jojojol P ojo ofjo pPjo 1 1 JOJOJOJO 5 e joz ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojol afj lt j lt jofjo lt ojo jofo pPjo 1 1 JOJOJOJO 8 fio frojoo
275. olor Image Adjustment Brightness Contrast color Balance 7 26 C350 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters 7 3 Touch List Ls ato and Erb to select the desired setting and then touch Enter N _ 2 Ready to copy o lt O To cancel the Brightness function touch Cancel in the Brightness screen Application Functions N Additional Information A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39 C350 7 27 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters To adjust the Contrast parameter This parameter can be used to make the image either crisper or smoother 1 Touch Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment Ready to copy SIRS 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Contrast Y Bensity 3 Touch i at and rr select the desired igrCc Photo ey setting and then touch Enter o To cancel the Contrast function touch Cancel in the Contrast screen N Additional Information A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39
276. olored areas or the colors of the image inversed This allows you to make a copy of a positive image from color or B W negative films For details refer to To set the Neg Pos Reverse function on page 7 44 Asc mm ABC Enlarging the image and printing it on multiple pages A single document page can be automatically split into parts with each part printed enlarged For details refer to To make settings for the Multi Page Enlargement function on I IEF Printing a mirror image of the document A copy can be printed in the mirror image of the original document For details refer to To make settings for the Mirror Image function on page 7 51 o o xxiv C350 Available Features Reducing the image and printing multiple copies on one page The document image can be reduced to postcard size and four copies can be printed on a single sheet of paper For details refer to Reducing the Document to Postcard Size and Printing Multiple Copies on One Page Postcard Function on page 7 54 29 os Managing copying The print status of copy jobs can be checked and the jobs can be managed For details refer to Overview of Jobs on page 8 2 C350 XXV Explanation of Basic Concepts and Symbols Explanation of Basic Concepts and Symbols The use of words and symbols in this manual are explained below Width and Length Whenever paper dim
277. on leau 3 Inthe Creation screen touch Color Separation T Photo i Density di Postcard 7 42 C350 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 7 4 Select either Each or Black and then touch Beale espar ation Enter N _ o a ok oO C O Density Application Color Separation cance Enter e AZ eeg EMEEK TE o To cancel the Color Separation function touch Cancel in the Color Separation screen Application Functions 5 If necessary specify any other copy settings 6 Press the Start key C350 7 43 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions To set the Neg Pos Reverse function This function allows you to copy a document with the light and dark colored areas or the colors of the image inversed 1 Position the document s to be copied 8 Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Application and then touch Creation 3 Inthe Creation screen touch Neg Pos Reverse o Tocancel the Neg Pos Reverse function touch Neg Pos Reverse again N Additional Information Ready to copy OrigrCopy Beltitu Booklet 4 Original 4 Creation Application olor mage di
278. opy programs stored with the Mode Store function can be recalled BA Settin e The paper source used when printing from the computer in addition to the fonts can be specified and reports can be printed For details on the printer settings refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide 10 2 C350 10 1 Utility Screen 1 0 pa Mic Tite Indicator 4 Refer to page 10 30 e The usage level for the various supplies and parts can be checked Refer to page 10 31 e The Administrator mode allows the use of this machine to be controlled by allowing various functions to be set according to need e The administrator access number 8 digit password must be entered in order to set the Administrator mode functions For details on the administrator access number contact the service representative mmm ster 16 page 10408 Coverage V e The total average usage ratio calculated in Letter pages for each color of toner cyan magenta yellow and black can be checked C350 10 3 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 2 Programming Recalling Copy Programs 10 2 Programming Recalling Copy Programs Setting the Reset Mode Function The settings selected when this machine is turned on the power switch is set to I are called the default settings By specifying the default settings the desired copy settings are selec
279. or 2nd door unit right side door p 11 29 drawer p 11 26 4 A paper misfeed in the bypass tray 10 A paper misfeed in the 3rd or 4th p 11 23 drawer p 11 27 5 A paper misfeed in the large 11 A paper misfeed in finisher FS 601 capacity paper feed cabinet p 11 46 p 11 28 6 A paper misfeed in finisher FS 501 12 A staple jam in the finisher FS 601 job separator page 11 41 p 11 53 11 22 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 11 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Bypass Tray N Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Remove all paper from the bypass tray 2 If misfed paper cannot be pulled out pull the lever for the sliding plate of the bypass tray and then pull the sliding plate toward you C350 11 23 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 3 Pull the sliding plate toward you and then carefully pull out any misfed paper 4 Pull the lever and then open the right side door of the 1st drawer 5 Carefully pull out any misfed paper SISIISSISIIS 6 Close the right side door 11 24 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 1 1 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Automatic Duplex Unit N Refe
280. or are red green blue cyan magenta and yellow Single Color Copies are printed in the specified color regardless of the whether the scanned document is in color or black and white The color used for producing the copy can be set to one of the 20 available Black Copies of the scanned document are printed only in black C350 3 5 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 3 Selecting a Color Setting To select the Color setting 1 Touch Color A screen appears showing the available Color settings 2 Select the desired Color setting Ready tu Copy 3 To produce two color copies touch 2 Color and then touch the key for the color to be used one for the areas printed in ereto color Ready to copy Yellow li 4 To produce one color copies touch Single Color Oo Inthe Single Color 1 or Single Color 2 screens touch the key for the desired color o To change how color gradations in the document are reproduced touch Solid 3 6 C350 3 3 Selecting a Color Setting 3 Ne Additional Information When the Single Color setting is selected the following two methods for reproducing gradations in documents are available Relative luminosity The document will be copied using monocolor concentration variations to express color differences color shading that can be seen with the eye and gradation levels This enable
281. or the paper inside the area that excludes the margins touch With Margin O To make copies so that the paper is filled regardless of the margins touch Without Margin In this case the area of the image within the margins at the edge of the paper is lost Original Size Application Functions 6 Normally the document size is automatically detected However if you wish to specify the document size touch Original Size Input O Select the document size and then touch Enter Ready to copy Photo Size For Custom Size 7 Ifthe desired document size is not listed touch Other Sizes to display a screen containing additional document sizes O Select the appropriate document size and F then touch Enter Ready to copy Orig gt Copy FB lg tu Original size hoto Size For Custom Size C350 7 19 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 7 Tiling Copy Images Image Repeat Function 8 To specify a photo size or a non standard size touch Photo Size or Custom Size O Select a photo size or touch X and Y and touch and to select the size of the original and then touch Enter Ready to copy 9 Inthe Image Repeat screen touch Enter o To cancel the Image Repeat function touch Cancel in the Image Repeat screen 10 If necessary specify any other copy set
282. ot turn off the machine while a gueued job or stored data is waiting to be printed otherwise the jobs will be deleted When the Machine Is Turned Off e The following are deleted O Settings that are not programmed such as the number of copies O Jobs queued to be printed O Jobs stored in the memory O Jobs saved with the Reprint function e Stored zoom ratios programmed Copy mode settings Utility mode settings and the data in the User Box are not erased 2 20 C350 2 4 Using the Touch Panel 2 2 4 Using the Touch Panel Description of the Touch Panel The screen that appears when this machine is turned on the power switch is set to is the Basic screen 11 25 Ready to copy Control S Status 295 Delete The Basic screen uses graphics and messages to show the currently selected settings the modes and functions that can be selected and the status of the machine Default Settings The default settings are those that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on the power switch is set to I and before any mode or function is changed and that are selected when the Reset key is pressed to reset all functions and modes The default settings serve a
283. ouble sided copying cannot be performed Referred to as the automatic duplex unit throughout the manual Desk DK 501 optional Using the desk allows this machine to be set up on the floor Referred to as the desk throughout the manual 2 2 C350 2 1 Components and Their Functions 2 No Part Name Description Paper Feed Cabinet PC 101 optional Paper Feed Cabinet PC 201 optional Paper feed cabinet PC 101 is equipped with a single paper drawer The top drawer can be loaded with 500 sheets of paper and the bottom drawer can be used as storage Referred to as the single paper feed cabinet throughout the manual Paper feed cabinet PC 201 is equipped with two paper drawers Both the top and the bottom drawers can be loaded with 500 sheets of paper Referred to as the double paper feed cabinet throughout the manual Paper Feed Cabinet PC 401 optional Equipped with a large capacity paper drawer that can supply 2 500 sheets of paper Referred to as the large capacity paper feed cabinet throughout the manual Finisher FS 601 optional Finishes printed pages according to the selected Output setting sorting stapling hole punching or binding then feeds out the pages Referred to as the finisher throughout the manual e Hole punching is only available if the optional punch kit PK 501 is installed onto finisher FS 601 In order to instal
284. pages Letter L C 2 to 50 sheets Legal L 11 X 17 L 2 to 25 sheets Lower paper output tray Paper size no of bound pages Letter L 11 X 17 L 2 to 10 sheets Punch setting Paper sizes 3 hole Letter C 11 X17 L 2 hole Letter L C Legal L 11 X 17 L Number of punched holes 2 3 Power requirements Supplied from main unit Punch kit supplied from finisher Power consumption Less than 65 W Dimensions 23 3 4 width X 23 3 4 depth X 36 3 4 height Weight 91 3 4 Ib including the horizontal transport unit Consumables 1 staple cartridge 5 000 staples for stapling 50 sheets 13 6 C350 13 1 Specifications 13 92 mo Finisher FS 501 5 o Specifications O Output trays Primary paper output tray non sorted copies Secondary paper output tray sorted copies 0 c Settings Non sort Sort Group and Staple settings o Paper types Primary paper output tray S Non sort setting Plain paper 16 to 24 lb thick paper 1 24 1 4 to 40 Ib thick paper 2 40 1 4 to 55 1 2 Ib 3 thick paper 3 55 3 4 to 68 Ib overhead projector transparencies O postcards envelopes label sheets J Secondary paper output tray Sort Group settings Plain paper 16 to 24 lb Staple setting Plain paper 16 to 24 lb Paper sizes Primary paper output tray 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L C Executive L C Letter L C Legal L 11 X 17 L 12 1 4 X
285. pecify any other copy settings 10 Press the Start key C350 7 53 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions Reducing the Document to Postcard Size and Printing Multiple Copies on One Page Postcard Function The document can be reduced to the size of a postcard and up to four copies can be printed on one sheet of Letter size postcard paper To make settings for the Postcard function 1 Position the document s to be copied 8 Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Application and then touch Creation application Color q Image Adi stment A 3 Inthe Creation screen touch Postcard ene ea w a 7 54 C350 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions N 4 Select either With Image of original will be repeated g Margin or Without g Margin 5 Layout 1 Sigina Set side Original to print face up i a cassette N Additional Information There are two ways of arranging the print image with the Postcard function Application Functions With Margin Select this setting to reduce the image so that it fits within the allowable print area for the paper inside the area that excludes the margins Without Margin Select this setting to make copies so that the paper is fill
286. pies can be specified for example the copy can be printed in full color or in a single color For details refer to Selecting a Color Setting on page 3 5 Sorting copies While printing multiple copies the copies can be divided into the separate sets For details refer to Sorting Sort Setting on page 3 8 Stapling copies Copies can be stapled together before they are fed out For details refer to Stapling with finisher FS 501 installed on page 3 10 For details refer to Stapling with finisher FS 601 installed on page 3 10 s Be Holes for filing can be punched in the copies Punching holes in copies For details refer to Hole Punching on page 3 11 C350 xvii Available Features Adjusting copies to the size of the paper The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size For details refer to Automatic Scaling Auto Zoom Setting on page 3 13 Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios copies of the document can be resized as desired For details refer to Custom Sizing Manual Zoom Settings on page 3 14 eo mp pec a Automatically selecting the paper The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified
287. r feed it through the bypass tray or the 1st drawer 4 Load the paper into the left side of the paper drawer for the large capacity paper feed cabinet so that the side of the paper to be printed on the side facing up when the package was unwrapped faces up x Reminder If the paper is curled flatten it before loading it Do not load so many pages that the top of the stack is higher than the W mark Paper other than plain paper cannot be fed from the large capacity paper feed cabinet If you wish to make copies onto paper other than plain paper feed it through the bypass tray or the 1st drawer 5 Close the paper drawer of the large capacity paper feed cabinet 2 34 C350 2 9 Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray 2 9 Loading Paper Into the Bypass Tray Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto paper that is not loaded into a paper drawer or if you wish to copy onto thick paper postcards envelopes overhead projector transparencies or label sheets N Reference For details on specifying the paper size for the bypass tray refer to To specify the size of the paper in the bypass tray on page 3 21 1 Open the bypass tray O When loading large sized paper open the tray extension 2 With the side to be printed on facing down insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot 3 Adjust the lateral guides to fit the size
288. r details on setting the Reprint function refer to Setting the Reprint Function on page 10 50 To set the Reprint OFF function Touch Basic and then touch Reprint OFF Ready to copy The reprint feature is suspended Copy 1 Set R Hint To cancel the Reprint OFF function touch Reprint OFF again 6 2 C350 6 2 Copying Documents of Mixed Sizes Mixed Original Function 6 6 2 Copying Documents of Mixed Sizes Mixed Original Function With the Mixed Original function documents of various standard sizes can be loaded into the reverse automatic document feeder and scanned There are two ways to copy documents of mixed page sizes e With the paper automatically selected The copies are produced using paper of the same size as the document pages y e With the zoom ratio automatically selected The copies are produced with the image enlarged or reduced to fit the specified paper size E Ke _ 7 o lt Additional Copy Operations C350 6 3 Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations 6 6 2 Copying Documents of Mixed Si
289. r the Corner Staple or the 2 Staples Output setting can be selected However the pages can be stapled only if all of the following conditions are met e There are between 2 and 50 pages in the document However if the document size is larger than Legal the document can contain no more than 25 pages e f standard size paper is used the paper sizes must be 11 x 17 L Legal L Letter L and Letter C e f non standard size paper is used the paper width must be between 7 1 4 in and 11 3 4 in e f non standard size paper is used the paper length must be between 7 1 4 in and 17 in e Copies are printed only on plain paper e If the Mixed Original function is used the copies must be produced with paper of the same width e This machine must not be set to Interrupt mode e The Image Adjustment function on the Application screen is not used 3 10 C350 3 4 Selecting Output Settings 3 Hole Punching Holes for filing copies in binders can be punched The position of the punched holes can be specified along the left side or along the top of the paper However the holes can be punched only if all of the following conditions are met e Finisher FS 601 is installed e Punch kit PK 501 is installed e f standard size paper is used the paper sizes must be as follows Legal L 11 x 17 L Letter L and Letter C with the 2 Hole Punch setting 11 x 17 Land Letter C with the 3 Hole Punch se
290. r the copy page 7 8 Shows the stapling or hole punching position that must be selected page 3 11 A dash indicates that no setting should be selected 14 6 C350 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications 14 Single Sided Documents Single Sided Document Single Sided Copy Original Direction Finished Copy Output Margin File Output Setting Setting Margin Position Orig gt Setting Copy Applica Screen tion Screen 5 Corner d Staple ti 2 page 7 gt 112 page Hole gt Punch jum 2 2 Staples Original Direction i page Crosswise Hole Punch 2 Staples TE p 1 Tum 2 page Corner gt Staple 1 Turn 2 the page gt 1 Turn 2 Y the page Hole gt Punch Original Direction 1 Tum 2 2 Staples Lengthwise u the page Hole Punch gt 2 Staples Turn 2 the page C350 14 7 Chapter 14 Appendix Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 Loading Documents for Specific Applications Single Sided Document Single 2in1 Copy
291. rase 4 Original Glass Chapter 6 Mode Check Brightness Contrast Saturation ae Green Blue Portrait Bengity A color Balance Additional Copy Operations C350 6 17 Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations 6 6 8 Checking the Settings Mode Check se OOOO To change the settings 1 Press the Mode Check key Mode Check D 2 Touch Next or Previous until the screen containing the setting that you wish to change appears 3 Touch the key for the setting that you wish to change The corresponding screen appears 4 Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting 6 18 C350 Application Functions Application Functions Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 1 Storing the Scanned Image in the Memory Scan to Memory Function 7 1 Storing the Scanned Image in the Memory Scan to Memory Function This function allows the scanned image to be stored in the memory and printed only when it is deleted from the memory This is useful for example when you wish to combine the job with anot
292. re your health e Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this product Heat could accumulate inside the product resulting in a fire or malfunction e Do not install this product at a site that is exposed to direct sunlight or near an air conditioner or heating apparatus The resultant temperature changes inside the product could cause a malfunction fire or electrical shock e Do not place the product in a dusty place or a site exposed to soot or steam near a kitchen table bath or a humidifier A fire electrical shock or breakdown could result e Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench or in a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock It could drop or fall causing personal injury or mechanical breakdown e After installing this product mount it on a secure base If the unit moves or falls it may cause personal injury e Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy disk or watch that are susceptible to magnetism They could cause these products to malfunction The inside of this product has areas subject to high temperature which may cause burns When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as a paper misfeed do not touch the locations around the fusing unit etc which are indicated by a CAUTION HOT caution label Do not place any objects around the power plug as the power plug may be difficult to pull out when an emergency occurs The socket outlet
293. read carefully N Reference Text highlighted in this manner indicates sections containing additional information If necessary refer to the indicated sections C350 xxvii Explanation of Manual Conventions R Condition Text highlighted in this manner provides information concerning the combining of functions key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above xxviii C350 Energy Star Energy Star tii As an ENERGY STAR Partner we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency What is an ENERGY STAR Product An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a low power mode after a period of inactivity An ENERGY STAR product uses energy more efficiently saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment Trademarks and Registered Trademarks bizhub is a trademark of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies C350 Xxix Legal Restrictions on Copying Legal Restrictions on Copying Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such documents off as the originals The following is not a complete list but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying lt Financial Instruments g
294. rection Bk Positio 10 78 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 1 0 6 Check that Stabilize is selected and then Expert User Mode press the Start key Stabilization START to began The indicator on the Start key lights up in orange and the image stabilization operation is performed When the image stabilization operation is finished the indicator on the Start key lights up in green Stabilize Reset History before Stabilizing 7 Touch Enter 8 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear o G _ o 2 O r The Basic screen appears again Utility Mode Operations C350 10 79 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions Setting the PRT Area Top Margin Function This function is used to adjust the printing position at the left edge of the paper in comparison to the paper feed direction The top margin of the print area can be adjusted for each paper type The procedure described below is for 11 x 17 size paper R Condition The top margin of the print area is adjusted during manufacturing of the machine Normally the top margin will not need to be adjusted Load 11 x 17 size paper into the 1st drawer Turn the media type selection dial to the setting for the type of eS paper load
295. refix C350 10 65 o _ 5 2 O al Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 8 Administrator Settings 9 Type in the prefix and then touch Enter O O O The prefix can contain a maximum of 20 characters The keypad can also be used to type in the number If Cancel is touched the setting is not registered To enter uppercase letters touch CAPS Admin Set Enter Pref ix To delete characters that have been entered touch Del 10 Specify the suffix in the same way and then touch Enter O O O The suffix can contain a maximum of 40 characters The keypad can also be usedto type in the number If Cancel is touched the setting is not registered To enter uppercase letters touch CAPS 0O Admin Set Enter the Suffix Suffix To delete characters that have been entered touch Del 11 Touch Enter 12 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again 10 66 C350 10 9 Setting the Gradation Adjustment Function 10 10 9 Setting the Gradation Adjustment Function The color gradation levels can be adjusted if they are incorrect In addition perform the Gradation Adjustment function after replacing the imaging
296. reload certain pages of the document that have already been fed through the reverse automatic document feeder Load the indicated document pages into the reverse automatic document feeder Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative and provide code The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies Inform your service representative of the code displayed on the touch panel If any message other than those listed above appears perform the operation described in the message C350 11 71 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 11 11 11 Main Messages and Their Remedies 11 72 C350 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting ROEG Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 12 1 When the Print Quality Is Low 12 1 When the Print Quality Is Low Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The printed output is too light The copy density is set too light Select a darker Density setting See page 3 44 The paper is damp Replace the paper See page 2 26 page 2 31 page 2 33 page 2 35 The copy density is set too dark Select a lighter Density setting See page 3 44 The document was not pressed close enough against the original glass Position the document so that itis pressed closely against the original glass See page 2 44 The printed output is blurry The paper is damp
297. rence For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Open the automatic duplex unit door 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper 3 Close the automatic duplex unit door C350 11 25 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the 1st or 2nd Drawer au Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Pull the lever and then open the right side door of the 1st drawer JIII 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper JIJJJJJJJJJI 3 Close the right side door 4 Pull out the paper drawer and then remove any misfed paper S Reminder Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take up roller in the 1st drawer or the film in the 2nd drawer with your hands 5 Close the paper drawer 11 26 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 11 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in a Paper Drawer 3rd or 4th Drawer N Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Pull the lever and then open the right side door of the paper y drawer 3rd or 4th drawer 2
298. ridge Appears 8 Slowly pull out the charger cleaning tool as far as possible Next slowly push in the charger cleaning tool as much as possible Repeat the above operations three times 9 Securely insert the charger cleaning tool and then close the front door A Reminder If the door cannot be closed securely the toner cartridge securing lever may not be in its correct position Check that the toner cartridge securing lever is correctly positioned x Condition When replacing the black toner cartridge be sure to replace the filter The filter is included in the package with the black toner cartridge x Reference For details on the filter refer to Supplies and Parts on page 2 16 S Reminder When installing the new filter fully insert it until it snaps into place 11 10 C350 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears 1 1 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears When finisher FS 501 or FS 601 is installed and is about to run out of staples the message shown below appears Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge Ready to copy Replace Staple Cartridge E user Job Name Status End
299. ries not subject to Class B regulations WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This device must be used with a shielded network 10 Base T 100 Base TX cable and a shielded parallel cable The use of non shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules LED Radiation Safety This product is a copier which operates by means of a LED light emitting diodes exposure system There is no possibility of danger from the LED optical radiation because the LED optical radiation level does not exceed the accessible radiation limit of class 1 under all conditions of operation maintenance service and failure Ozone Release Locate the machine in a Well Ventilated Room A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this machine An unpleasant odor may however be created in poorly ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations For a comfortable healthy and safe operating environment it is recommended that the room be well ventilated Placer l appareil dans une pi ce largement ventil e Une quantit d ozone n gligable est d gag e pendant le fonctionnement de l appareil quand celui ci est utilis normalement Cependant une odeur d sagr able peut tre ressentie dans les pi ces dont l a ration est insuffisante et lorsque
300. rinter Size Total number of 2 color printouts on paper specified as large sized 2 Color Copy 2 Color Printer Total number of 2 color copies and printouts Utility Utility Counter List Total Counter Large Size Counter Duplex Copy Duplex Print Scanner Counter Copy Print _ 2 When printing the list be sure that Letter L paper is loaded into the 1st drawer 4 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again C350 10 9 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 4 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 1 Functions 10 4 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 1 Functions Setting the Key Click Sound Function This function is used to specify whether or not a confirmation beep is sounded each time a key on the touch panel or a key in the control panel is pressed The default setting is ON 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch User s Choice 1 3 Touch Key Click Sound User s Choice 1
301. riss Cross Yes Yes User s Choice 2 criss cross output each s You can choose whether or not you want to et Criss Cross 10 20 C350 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 1 0 Setting the Paper Type Select Function This function is used to specify that special paper is loaded into any paper drawer other than the 1st drawer and the bypass tray The default setting is Normal If a drawer is set to any setting other than Normal the paper in that drawer is not automatically selected with the Auto Paper Select setting or with double sided copying N Hint Toprinton the specified special paper manually select the paper drawer loaded with the special paper 1 Press the Utility key Touch User s Choice 2 Touch 2 3 A OO N Touch Paper Type Select User s Choice 2 t paper originals Auto selec i For small Yes C350 10 21 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 5 Specifying Default Settings User s Choice 2 Functions 5 Touch the key for the paper drawer that YOU prea wish to set Select Paper Type for desired tray Single Sided Onl
302. ropriate paper size setting e For details on selecting the paper size refer to Selecting a Paper Size Setting on page 3 18 Highly translucent or transparent documents such as overhead projector transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper e The document size cannot be detected automatically Place a blank sheet of paper of the same size over the document Thick objects such as books e With thick books the original cover or the reverse automatic document feeder if it is installed cannot be closed Scan the document without closing the original cover or the reverse automatic document feeder e Donot place objects exceeding 4 1 2 lb on the original glass In addition if a book is placed on the original glass do not press it down extremely hard otherwise the original glass may be damaged Small Sized Documents If a document that is too small to be automatically detected is loaded with the Auto Paper Select setting selected copies cannot be made However changing the setting of the Auto select paper for small originals function on the User s Choice 2 screen allows copying to begin even if the paper size cannot automatically be detected For details refer to Setting the Auto select paper for small originals Function on page 10 23 Centering If the document is smaller than the size of the selected paper the image is printed in the center of the paper Whether or not the image is centere
303. rs 11 Touch to display the message shown in the following illustration provide code gt TEL Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative and D200 N Reminder Ifthis message appears contact your service representative When contacting the service representative be sure to inform them of the malfunction code C 0200 for the example shown above that was indicated C350 11 65 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 11 11 9 When The following units need to be replaced soon Appears 11 9 When The following units need to be replaced soon Appears When it is almost time to replace supplies or a part within this machine the message shown in the following illustration appears warning about the replacement period As an example the message warning that the yellow imaging unit will soon need to be replaced is shown below User Name Status 285 Delete The following units need to be replaced soon Imaging Unit Yellow Display in Enlarge Display Mode When the replacement period is almost reached 1 appears in the screen on the touch panel Ready to copy Mixed Original 11 66 C350 11 9 When The following units need to be replaced soon Appears 1 1 Touch _ to display the message shown in the following illustration Imaging Unit Y ne
304. s Creation 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Blue Density 3 Touch tt and rre to select the desired setting and then touch Orig gt Copy Enter Ready to copy o Tocancelthe Blue function touch Cancel in the Blue screen N Additional Information A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39 C350 7 33 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters To adjust the Color Balance parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the individual concentrations of cyan C magenta M yellow Y and black Bk To increase the red tinge e Increase the amount of yellow and magenta e Decrease the amount of cyan To increase the green tinge e Increase the amount of yellow and cyan e Decrease the amount of magenta To increase the blue tinge e Increase the amount of magenta and cyan e Decrease the amount of yellow To increase the yellow tinge Increase the amount of yellow e Decrease the amount of magenta and cyan To increase the black tinge e Increase the amount of black 1 Touch Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment Ready to copy 7 34 C35
305. s 8 Carefully pull out any misfed documents 9 Carefully open the document output tray as far as possible O Check that the tray remains secured with the guide open 10 Turn the dial to feed out any misfed documents 11 Carefully pull out any misfed documents 11 38 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 11 12 Lower the document output tray 13 Open the reverse automatic document feeder and then carefully pull out any misfed documents 14 Remove any documents on the original glass and then close the reverse automatic document feeder C350 11 39 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 15 Close the left side and right side misfeed clearing covers 16 Reload the documents according to the instructions that appear on the touch panel 11 40 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 11 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in Finisher FS 501 N Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine 2 Open the horizontal transport unit cover and then remove any misfed paper C350 11 41 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touc
306. s KWANT GIE Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 1 Utility Screen 10 1 Utility Screen The various functions available in Utility mode are described below When the Utility key is pressed the following screen appears Utility User s Copy Program Choice 2 Recall Unit Life i Indicator Admin Mode a Refer to page 10 4 e Reset Mode function The default settings selected after this machine is reset can be changed e Mode Store function Up to 10 copy programs of user defined copy settings can be stored Refer to page 10 8 e The number of the various types of prints can be viewed MC BS S Choice Choice 2 Refer to page 10 10 e Various functions can be set according to the user s needs e There are two User s Choice screens Functions concerning the operation of the machine are available on the User s Choice 1 screen and functions concerning jobs are available on the User s Choice 2 screen The functions on the User s Choice 1 screen can be set while a job is being printed however the functions on the User s Choice 2 screen cannot be set while a job is being printed capo Program Recall 4 Refer to page 10 7 e The copy settings from c
307. s a reference for all operations that are to be made The default settings when this machine is purchased are listed below e Number of copies 1 e Margin None specified e Color Auto Color e Thick Original Off e Output Non Sort e Photo Density Text amp Photo e Zoom x 1 000 Full Size Screen Pattern Gradation e Paper Size Auto Paper Select e Background density Standard e Mixed Original Off e Copy density Standard e Copy 1 Set Off e Glossy Off e Original 1 single sided e Application All off e Copy 1 single sided e Color Image Adjustment Standard e Original Direction None specified e Creation All off Chapter 2 Before Making Copies C350 2 21 Chapter 2 Before Making Copies 2 2 4 Using the Touch Panel R Hint The language of the displays in the touch panel can be changed using the Language Select function on the User s Choice 2 screen For details refer to Setting the Language Select Function on page 10 16 The default settings that the machine resets all functions to can be specified using the Utility mode For details refer to Setting the Reset Mode Function on page 10 4 2 22 C350 2 5 Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel 2 5 Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation O Upper position base position
308. s higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 User name Displays the type source of the job COPIER is displayed for copy jobs 4 Status Displays the status of the job 5 Destination Indicates the tray where the printed pages will be fed out 6 File name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer 7 Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 8 Copy Displays the specified number of pages to be printed With jobs listed as Printing the number of pages remaining to be printed is counted down 9 Job start Displays the time that the job was queued To print stored data 1 Select the job that you wish to delete from the memory To delete multiple jobs continue selecting all desired jobs 2 Touch OK 8 12 C350 8 3 Job Control Screens 8 Locked Jobs Screen N Reference For details on setting the Locked Jobs function refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide Touch Locked Jobs The locked Jobs screen containing the list of locked jobs appears Locked jobs box print jobs can be unlocked and printed To return to the Basic screen touch Basic 3 4 5 6 7 ero ME user Status Dest File Name Orig Copy 328 Input correct password 13 XXXXXX Frea Ele 17 1 20 to allow printing of R A EE locked job IR 000000 P9Bkea Elev 2 1 20 08 IKE 000000 P3kea Elev Pa
309. s listed in this manual Ver07 Please note that some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the purchased product Warning and Precaution Symbols AN WARNING Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death AN CAUTION Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property Meaning of Symbols l A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution ZA This symbol warns against cause burns A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action O Ys symbol warns against dismantling the device A black circle indicates an imperative course of action Ens symbol indicates you must unplug the device 1 2 C350 1 1 For Safe Use 1 N WARNING e Do not modify this product as a fire electrical shock or breakdown could result If the product employs a laser the laser beam source could cause blindness e Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have been fixed to the product Some products have a high voltage part or a laser beam source inside that could cause an electrical shock or blindness 0 O Use only the power cord supplied in the package If a power cord is not supplied only use the power cord and plug that is specified in POWER CORD INSTRUCTION Failure to use this cord could result in a fire or electrical shock e Use the power cord supplied in the package only for this machine and NEVER use it for any oth
310. s the color of markers the blue lines in graphing paper and the red of stamps to be distinctly reproduced in copies This method is selected as the factory default 99 _ D o lt Average brightness The document will be copied using monocolor concentration variations to only express gradation levels regardless of the color differences in the original document This is useful for producing monocolor copies of documents containing gradation differences such as magazines and newspapers and for offsetting the yellow tint in documents that have yellowed To select this method touch Solid 5 Touch Enter Basic Copy Operations C350 3 7 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 4 Selecting Output Settings 3 4 Selecting Output Settings Various settings for sorting and finishing copies are available R Reference The Output settings can be used together with other functions For details refer to the Function Combination Table on page 14 25 The following copy sorting and finishing methods are available R Condition The Corner Staple and 2 Staples settings are available only if the optional finisher FS 601 is installed The Hole Punch setting is available only if the punch kit is attached to the optional finisher FS 601 The Corner Staple setting is available only if the optional finisher FS 501 is installed Non Sorting Non Sort Setting The copies
311. s the loading location of the document to be switched between the original glass and the reverse automatic document feeder partly through the copy job Application Functions Document Copy TS 2 gt Document capacity 100 sheets of plain paper 21 1 4 lb or 38 sheets of thick paper 55 3 4 lb C350 7 3 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 2 Scanning the Document in Separate Batches Separate Scan Function To use the Separate Scan function 1 Touch Application The Application screen appears Touch Separate Scan Ready to copy O To cancel the Separate Scan i OrigrCopy Application function touch Separate Scan Separate Memor i Scan again _ color Edge Frame 7 d tment If necessary specify Erase 4 4 any other copy settings Fat i e Que inter Booklet Creation Position the document s to be copied Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 Press the Start key Repeat steps 4 and 5 After all pages of the Scanning has completed To continue document have been scanning press the Start Key scanned touch Finish and then press aman the Start key the scanned 15 The number below has been assigned to JO Finish Key Finish When scanning is complete press the Number Of scans 7 4 C350 7 3 Printing Distribution Numbers on Cop
312. ser s Choice Admin Mode I o G _ 5 2 O lt Toner Coverage The total average usage ratio for each color of toner is displayed Total average toner coverage for all colors Cyan yasen Yellow Black Black 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 Utility Mode Operations 3 Touch Exit and then touch Exit in the Utility screen The Basic screen appears again C350 10 105 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 12 Viewing Toner Usage Toner Coverage Function 10 106 C350 Touch Panel Messages Touch Panel Messages MOE IAN Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 1 When the Message Toner Cartridge X needs to be replaced soon Appears 11 1 When the Message Toner Cartridge X needs to be replaced soon Appears When toner is about to run out the advance warning message shown below appears As an example the message for the yellow toner is shown below Ready to copy Toner Cartridge Y needs to be replaced soon on Auto Paper Select 1 Paper Size
313. sitioned correctly Correctly position the document against the document width scales See page 2 44 If the reverse automatic document feeder is installed correctly adjust the document guides for the size of the document See page 2 41 The document is not positioned correctly in the reverse automatic document feeder If the document cannot be fed correctly through the reverse automatic document feeder make copies by positioning the document on the original glass See page 2 44 The original glass is dirty while using the reverse automatic document feeder Wipe the glass with a soft dry cloth See page 9 2 The document guides are not slid up against the edges of the document Slide the document guides against the edges of the document Curled paper was loaded into the paper drawer Flatten the paper before loading it The printed page is curled The paper that was used as with recycled paper curls easily Remove the paper from the paper drawer turn it over and then load it again Replace the paper with paper that is not damp C350 12 3 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 12 1 When the Print Quality Is Low Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The edge of the printed output is dirty Either the document pad or the document transfer belt is dirty Clean the document pad or the document transfer b
314. sk is locked If the hard disk is locked the password must also be specified in order to unlock it The default setting is No R Condition HDD Lock appears only if the optional hard disk is installed N Additional Information Locking the hard disk prevents unauthorized access to the hard disk By selecting the HDD Lock function when the hard disk is already locked the password can be changed or the lock setting for the hard disk can be removed 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 3 4 6 Touch HDD Lock O Admin Set 10 52 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 7 Touch the key for the desired setting 8 Touch Enter O If No was selected the screen shown in step 6 appears o If Yes was selected continue with step 9 9 Using the keyboard that appears on the screen type in the 8 character O Admin Set Do you want to secure the HDD with password to prote m unauthorized access password and then touch Enter O The keypad can also be used to type in the password Oo If Cancel is touched the password is not specified The screen shown in step 6 appears again o To enter uppercase let
315. small to be detected is loaded O Position the document correctly Select the correct paper size This mode cannot be set with the XXXXXX Functions that cannot be used together are selected Make copies using only one of the functions The Exit Tray has reached its capacity Since the maximum amount of copies for the indicated finisher output tray has been exceeded the machine is unable to make copies Remove all copies from the indicated tray Input Volume Number and Access Number using the numerical Key Pad Access number have been specified Copies cannot be made unless an Volume number and its correct access number are entered Enter your Volume number and access number See Making Copies With an Account on page 6 10 Your account has reached its maximum allowance The limit on the number of copies that can be made has been reached Contact your administrator Close gt Section properly Since a machine door or cover is open or an option is not installed correctly the machine is unable to make copies Make sure that all doors and covers are closed and that all options are installed correctly Please insert the Fusing Unit and close all doors The fusing unit is not installed correctly Install the toner cartridge and then move the lever to the correct position The indicated toner cartridge is not installed correctly Please insert the
316. ssword Delete Hold Job a priortespess foo eprint The following details of the jobs are displayed No Item Name Description 1 Job number Job identification number assigned when the job is queued 2 Up down arrows When there are more than five jobs press these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list higher or lower in the printing order 3 User name Displays the type source of the job 4 Status Displays the status of the job 5 Destination Indicates the tray where the printed pages will be fed out 6 File name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer 7 Original Displays the number of pages in the original document 8 Copy Displays the specified number of pages to be printed With jobs listed as Printing the number of pages remaining to be printed is counted down 9 Job start Displays the time that the job was queued C350 8 13 o _ 5 2 O Kan Managing Jobs Chapter 8 Managing Jobs 8 8 3 Job Control Screens To print a locked job 1 Select the locked job that you wish to print To print multiple jobs together continue selecting all desired jobs 2 Using the keypad type in the 4 digit code for printing a locked job O For the unlocking code consult the person who queued the job using the Locked Jobs function 3 Touch Enter N Additional Information If the job currently bei
317. step 14 8 Ifthe lines are shifted as shown at the right touch L specify the desired negative adjustment for X between 1 dot and 6 dots we Expert User Mode To correct color shift press E e Correction Value can Paisa adjusted by using the r color Shift Correct 10 74 C350 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 10 9 If the lines are shifted as shown at the right touch to specify the desired positive adjustment for X between 1 dot and 6 dots 10 If the lines are shifted as shown at the right touch Y and then touch to specify the desired negative adjustment for Y between 1 dot and 6 dots 11 If the lines are shifted as shown at the right touch Y and then touch to specify the desired positive adjustment for Y between 1 dot and 6 dots 12 Press the Start key The adjusted test pattern is printed on 11 x 17 size paper C350 10 75 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions 13 Check the print result O If the distance between the black reference line and the cyan lines is adjusted to 0 continue with
318. strator mode allows the use of this machine to be controlled When this mode is selected a screen appears indicating that the administrator code must be entered Utility Input Administrator Code using the numerical Key Pad Administrator Code After typing in the 8 digit administrator code and touching Enter the following screen appears o G _ 5 2 O r Utility Admin Mode Utility Mode Operations Admin Set J Refer to page 10 33 e These functions are used to set various functions in order to control the use of this machine LEE 000 J Refer to page 10 89 e These functions are used to control the number of copies allowed by each account Printer Settin e These functions are used to specify the transmission timeout time and the screen pattern for computer printouts For details refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide C350 10 31 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 7 Administrator Mode Operations e These functions are used to specify the device name for this machine and the compression priority methods for PDF and TIFF files For details refer to the C350 Printer Controller User s Guide EC UOF Settin e These functions are used for specifying network settings such as the IP address of the F
319. t Personal checks Travelers checks Money orders Certificates of deposit Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Stock certificates lt Legal Documents gt Food stamps Postage stamps canceled or uncanceled Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies Internal revenue stamps canceled or uncanceled Passports Immigration papers Motor vehicle licenses and titles House and property titles and deeds lt General gt e Identification cards badges or insignias e Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner In addition itis prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies or works of art without permission of the copyright owner When in doubt about the nature of a document consult with legal counsel XXX C350 Installation and Operation Precautions Installation and Operation Precautions Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Installation and Operation Precautions 1 1 1 For Safe Use 1 1 For Safe Use This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine To achieve optimum utility of this device all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine Please read the next section before using this device lt contains important information related to user safety and preventing equipment problems Make sure you observe all of the precaution
320. t slightly shifted to the right in order to create a binding margin at the left copy Copies are printed with the contents of the document slightly shifted downward in order to create a binding margin at the top gt To use the File Margin function 1 Position the document s to be copied S Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Application The Application screen appears 3 Touch File Margin Ready to copy Image Adjustment A Booklet Original Creation FOHP Inter j leave 4 7 8 C350 7 4 Making Copies for Filing File Margin Function 7 4 Specify the desired binding margin position and then specify the desired width E tancer enter 7 Width N 0 ok oO C _Orig Copy 7BenSitu J application o To cancel the File Margin function touch Cancel in the File Margin screen R Additional Information Ifthe document is not loaded in the direction shown in the screen specify the document orientation in the Original Copy screen For details refer to Specifying Conditions of the Original on page 3 40 Application Functions 5 Touch Enter 6 If necessary specify any other copy settings 7 Press the Start key C350 7 9 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 5 Erasing Sections of Copies Edge Fra
321. taple cartridge O Fully insert the staple cartridge as far as possible C350 11 17 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears 9 Press the staple case down 10 Peel the tape off of the staple cartridge 11 Insert the staple cartridge holder making sure the tabs on the holder slide along the rails in the compartment 11 18 C350 11 3 When the Message Replace Staple Cartridge Appears 11 12 Insert the refilled staple cartridge holder until it locks into place O Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed 13 Carefully move the stapler unit back into its original position 14 Close the front door C350 11 19 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears Locations of Paper Misfeeds A flashing O indicates the location of the paper misfeed In addition a lit O indicates areas where paper may have been misfed and that should be checked As an example the following illustration shows a paper jam that occurred in a paper drawer Misfeed detected Job Remove misfeed at 0 Status End Delete R Hint The procedure for clearing misfed paper differs depend
322. te batches A document can be divided and scanned in a number of batches In addition the document pages can be alternately loaded onto the original glass or into the reverse automatic document feeder For details refer to Scanning the Document in Separate Batches Separate Scan Function on page 7 3 Printing distribution numbers on copies Each copy set can be printed with a distribution number in the background For details refer to Printing Distribution Numbers on Copies Set Numbering Function on page 7 5 Making copies for filing Copies can be printed with a file margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders For details refer to Making Copies for Filing File Margin Function on page 7 8 z gt Erasing sections of copies Areas such as the unclean looking frames around copies can be erased For details refer to Erasing Sections of Copies Edge Frame Erase Function on page 7 10 C350 xxi Available Features Adjusting the image to fit the paper size If the document size is different from the paper size the document image can be enlarged to fill the paper For details refer to Adjusting the Document Image Image Adjustment Function on page 7 14 Repeating copy images A document image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper For details refer to Tiling Copy Images Image Repeat Function on page 7 18
323. ted when the machine is turned on the power switch is set to I 1 Select the desired copy settings O For details refer to the Basic Copy Operations on page 3 1 2 Press the Utility key 3 Touch Store 4 Touch Reset Mode 5 Touch Current Mode Vip Additional Information copy Roda If Current Mode Utility Current was selected the Mode E copy settings Fark q Ls actory 3 selected before Default Utility mode was entered are stored as the default settings 6 Touch Enter and then touch Enter in the Store screen 7 Touch Exit The Basic screen appears again 10 4 C350 10 2 Programming Recalling Copy Programs 1 0 Storing Copy Programs User specified copy settings can be stored as copy programs Each of the 10 copy programs that are stored can be given a name Recall the copy programs by touching Copy Program Recall on the Utility screen 1 Select the desired copy settings O For details refer to the Basic Copy Operations on page 3 1 Press the Utility key Touch Store Touch Mode Store a A Oo D Touch the key for the number of the program where you wish to store the settings Utility Select Input Delete or Check he appropriate job key A screen appears allowing you
324. ters touch CAPS O To delete characters that have been entered touch Del The Retype New Password box appears Admin Set HDD Lock New Password Create a password to protect the HDD from unauthorized access C350 10 53 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 Type in the password again and then touch Enter The message Note Please turn the main switch of the copier OFF ON to activate HDD Lock appears m Admin Set s stored and HDD is ready to be locked HDD Lock BS 8suord Note Please turn the main switch of the copier OFF ON to activate HDD Lock Do not forget the password Retype New Password RRR 11 As instructed turn the machine off then on again The hard disk is locked S Reminder Be sure to keep the specified password in a safe place so that it will not be lost The currently specified password will be needed when changing the password or removing the lock setting for the hard disk 10 54 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 1 0 Changing the Password for the Hard Disk By selecting the HDD Lock function when the hard disk is already locked the password can be changed or the lock setting for the hard disk can be removed Follow the pr
325. the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller C350 11 35 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 6 Close the right side door Nick Reminder If the paper is misfed as described below contact your service representative The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit The paper that was removed tore and remains in the fusing unit 11 36 C350 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 1 1 Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Reverse Automatic Document Feeder N Reference For details on the positions of paper misfeeds refer to Paper Misfeed Staple Jam Indications on page 11 22 1 Open the misfeed clearing cover on the left side of the reverse automatic document feeder 2 Carefully pull out any documents from the document feed tray 3 Open the misfeed clearing cover on the right side of the reverse automatic document feeder 4 Turn the dial counterclockwise to feed out any misfed documents 5 Carefully pull out any misfed documents C350 11 37 Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages Chapter 11 Touch Panel Messages 1 1 11 4 When the Message Misfeed detected Appears 6 Open the guide 7 Turn the dial to feed out any misfed document
326. the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39 7 36 C350 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters 7 To adjust the Hue parameter The hue is divided into magenta yellow and cyan By adjusting the hue the image can be made either more reddish or more bluish N jo a ok 99 E 1 Touch Application and then touch Color l Image Adjustment i PBenSicy pplication Ready to copy Application Functions Booklet Original 4 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Hue 3 Touch atad ANC j to select the desired setting and then touch Enter Ready to copy Oo Tocancelthe Hue function touch Cancel in the Hue screen N Additional Information A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39 C350 7 37 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters To adjust the Copy Density parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the copy density to any of 19 levels between 3 and 3 1 Touch
327. ting continues without the settings for the Color Image Adjust parameters applied 40 14 21 1st drawer multipurpose paper drawer The functions cannot be combined if a paper size that cannot be 50 52 54 55 13 21 loaded into the 1st drawer is selected 56 57 A message appears warning that the 1st drawer is selected and the paper type was changed 25 28 70 Multi Page Enlargement function The zoom ratio specified for the Multi Page Enlargement function is applied 70 25 28 Multi Page Enlargement function A zoom ratio cannot be specified 77 66 71 Mixed Original function The function can be selected but the setting is not applied 66 71 77 60 61 79 Interrupt mode With the stapling setting on finisher FS 601 printing is interrupted between copy sets to interrupt the job 70 79 Interrupt mode The job cannot be interrupted while scanning while using the Multi Page Enlargement function 66 69 70 71 92 Centering function The function can be selected but the setting is not applied 92 66 69 70 71 93 13 21 Mode Store function A program using the 1st drawer cannot be stored 14 32 C350 14 3 Function Combination Table 1 4 All All Sample copies Another function cannot be selected while a sample copy is being printed When a sample copy is printed the mode returns to the one before the sample copy was printed The paper drawer is se
328. tings 11 Press the Start key 7 20 C350 7 8 Inserting Paper Between Transparencies OHP Interleave Function 7 7 8 Inserting Paper Between Transparencies OHP Interleave Function N o a ok x E 0 After each overhead transparency is copied a page from a different paper source can be added to the stack of transparencies as an overleaf In order to use this function the overhead transparencies should be loaded into the 1st drawer To use the OHP Interleave function 1 Load interleaf paper with the same size and orientation as the overhead transparencies into any paper drawer other than the 1st drawer 2 Position the document s to be copied N Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 Application Functions 3 Touch Application The Application screen appears 4 Touch OHP Interleave Ready to copy C350 7 21 Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 8 Inserting Paper Between Transparencies OHP Interleave Function 5 Select the paper drawer loaded with the paper for the interleaves and then touch Enter O Tocancel the OHP Interleave function touch Cancel in the OHP Interleave screen Add OHP film Insert Paper fOHP Inter Cancel a Enter a 7 OHP Size 6 If necessary specify any other copy settings 7 Press the Start key 7 22
329. tings from the Basic screen are also not available If both the Color and Black parameters are set to Prohibit no printing is possible In this case even if the account number and ts access number are correctly entered the Basic screen is not displayed 12 Touch Upper Limit Copy Print The Upper Limit Copy Print screen appears 13 Touch either Total or Color Black o G _ 5 2 O r Select area you wish to change and change Same setting for all volum or Al Volumes Volume Track g E K C Setti UPP Copy Print Volume Number Utility Mode Operations 14 Specify whether or not a limit will be applied to the number of prints allowed If Yes is selected touch the key beside Yes and then use the keypad to specify the limit for the number of prints allowed The maximum number of prints allowed can be set between 1 and 999 999 R Additional Information If Total is set to Yes Yes cannot be selected for Color Black In addition with Color Black selected the maximum number of prints cannot be specified If either the Color or the Black parameter or both parameters for Color Black are set to Yes Yes cannot be selected for Total In addition with Total selected the maximum number of prints cannot be specified
330. tion 18 Touch Paper Size Divide the image Of ori expand each o E Orig gt Copy inal into them Photo i sDensity pultisBage tancer enter Finish 1 Qygginer Auto Detect C350 7 49 Chapter 7 Application Functions Chapter 7 Application Functions 7 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 19 Select the paper size for the various parts of the enlarged image and then touch Enter Select finished copy size Metric 20 For paper sizes in metric measurements touch Metric A g E sDensity 3 Application O Select the desired Paper Size Enter paper size and then touch Enter 21 If necessary specify any other copy settings 22 Press the Start key This concludes the setting of the paper size for the Multi Page Enlargement function 7 50 C350 7 11 Editing Images Creation Functions 7 To make settings for the Mirror Image function This function allows you to produce a copy in the mirror image of the original document N o a ok 99 E 0 1 Position the document s to be copied R Reference For details refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Application and then touch Creation 4 A Density Ready to copy Application Functions Creation d t
331. tions Output trays Paper output tray and lower paper output tray Settings Normal functions Non sort Sort Sort Staple and Saddle Staple settings Hole punch functions Non sort Punch Sort Punch and Sort Staple Punch settings Paper types Paper output tray Non sort setting Plain paper 17 to 24 lb thick paper 1 24 1 4 to 40 Ib thick paper 2 40 1 4 to 55 1 2 Ib thick paper 3 55 3 4 to 68 Ib postcards envelopes overhead projector transparencies label sheets Sort and Sort Staple settings Plain paper 17 to 24 Ib Lower paper output tray Plain paper 17 to 24 Ib Paper sizes Paper output tray Non sort setting Letter L C 11 X 17 L 12 1 4X 18 L 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 L C 8 5X 14 L Sort setting Letter L C Legal L 11 X 17 L Sort Staple setting Letter L C Legal L 11 X 17 L Punch setting 3 hole Letter C 11 X17 L 2 hole Letter L C Legal L 11 X 17 L Lower paper output tray Letter L 11 Xx 17 L Paper capacity Paper output tray Plain paper 17 to 24 Ib 1 000 sheets of Letter L size paper or smaller or 500 sheets of Legal L size paper or larger Thick paper 1 2 3 24 1 4 to 68 Ib Postcards envelopes overhead projector transparencies label sheets 20 sheets Lower paper output tray 10 copies 6 to 10 bound pages 20 copies 2 to 5 bound pages Staple setting Paper output tray Paper sizes no of bound
332. tment screen touch Sharpness 3 Touch tt and re to select the desired setting and then touch Enter o To cancel the Sharpness function touch Cancel in the Sharpness screen N Additional Information Ready to copy pplication olor mage di stment 4 Creation Sharpness 1 2 3 A sample copy can be printed in order to check the print result with the current settings For details refer to To make sample copies on page 7 39 7 30 C350 7 10 Improving Color Copy Quality Color Image Adjustment Parameters 7 To adjust the Red parameter This parameter is used to adjust the level of red in the image N o a ok x E 0 1 Touch Application and then touch Color Image Adjustment Ready to copy pplication color Image Adjustment 4 Application Functions Creation 2 Inthe Color Image Adjustment screen touch Red PROS ity color Balance 3 Touch tt and rre to select the desired setting and then touch Enter o Tocancelthe Red function touch Cancel in the Red screen N Ad
333. ts or catalogs Text setting Select this setting when copying documents containing only text The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness providing an image that is easy to read 3 44 C350 3 10 Selecting Photo Density Settings 3 Dot Matrix Original setting Text setting Select this setting when copying documents consisting only of text that appears faint such as that written with a pencil G The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker providing text that is easy to read If Text is selected Dot Matrix Original appears Map setting Select this setting when copying documents with a background color or documents containing pencil markings or fine colored lines A sharp copy image is produced o _ D o lt Copied Paper setting Select this setting when copying images documents printed with this machine Background Setting of Density Parameter Manual e One of eight density settings can be selected for the density of the background color of documents e Each time the Lighter or Darker key is touched the background density is lightened or darkened by one level Basic Copy Operations Background Setting of Density Parameter Auto e Select this setting to automatically adjust the density level according to the document being copied Density Setting of Density Parameter e One of seven de
334. tting e f non standard size paper is used the paper width must be 8 1 2 or between 11 and 11 3 4 with the 2 Hole Punch setting between 11 and 11 3 4 with the 3 Hole Punch setting e f non standard size paper is used the paper length must be between 7 1 4 in and 17 in e Copies are printed only on plain paper This machine must not be set to Interrupt mode e The Image Adjustment function on the Application screen is not used o _ D O lt Basic Copy Operations C350 3 11 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 4 Selecting Output Settings To specify Output settings Nii Condition If a stapling or hole punching setting is selected be sure to load the document so that it is positioned correctly If the document is not positioned correctly the staples or punched holes will not be positioned correctly The correct position of the document is shown in the screen Be sure to position the document according to the instructions that appear Example Document position when the Hole Punch setting is selected The graphic shows that the document should be positioned so that the top of the document is toward the rear of this machine Select output mode Select CHANGE to ge st aple or hole 53 POSITIO punch positi 1 Touch Output A screen appears showing the available Output settings elect output mode Select CHANGE 2 Select the desire
335. ty Mode 6 7 Setting the Enlarged Display Clear Check Function Accessibility Mode When the panel reset timer operation is performed a message requesting confirmation to cancel the Enlarge Display mode can be displayed The default setting is No In addition it is possible to specify the display time for the message requesting confirmation to cancel the Enlarge Display mode R Hint The Enlarge Display mode is limited to basic copy tunctions The function and setting names and the illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily For details refer to the Enlarge Display Mode User s Guide 1 Press the Accessibility key 2 Touch Enlarged Display Clear Check 3 Select the desired setting and specify the display time 30 60 90 or 120 seconds for the message requesting confirmation to cancel the Enlarge Display mode O If you do not wish for the message requesting confirmation to CA Start interval User Assistance 0 8 sec 0 3 sec ISS Es ar check No User Assistance Set the display time of the Enlarged Display Clear Check Screen Enlarged Displa Clear Check 07 M Enter 120sec cancel the Enlarge Display mode to appear touch No C350 6 7 Setting the Enlarged Display Clear Check
336. type in the currently specified password and then touch Enter o If Cancel is touched the lock Change Fi Bassuord Disable setting for the hard disk is not removed The screen shown in step 6 appears again C350 10 57 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 8 Administrator Settings The message Note Please turn the main switch of the copier OFF ON to release HDD Lock appears Admin Set HDD Lock is ready to be released Note Please turn the main switch of the copier OFF ON to release HDD Lock 10 As instructed turn the machine off then on again The lock setting for the hard disk is removed Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 58 C350 10 8 Administrator Settings 10 Setting the Administrator Code Change Function This function is used to change the administrator code 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Admin Mode 3 Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter 4 Touch Admin Set 5 Touch 3 4 6 Touch Administrator Code Change Admin Set Re Administrator Code i Change 7 Use the keypad to type Admin Set in the currently specified administrator Enter the current Administrator Code code a
337. uInoog SeWOINY 8818494 O o o o o o o O O o O o o o o o o o O o O o o O o o o o o O O Setting selected later jseidoo Jo on No of copies 2 Reverse Automatic Document Feeder 3 Manual feeding 4 Auto Color ACS 5 Full Color 6 2 Color 7 Black 8 Auto Paper Select APS S 1st drawer ojojojojojojo ojojojojojojo v v ojojojojojojo w w ojojojojojojo w v v v ojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojoj jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojY ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo w w ojojojojojojojojojojojojofojofjojojojojojojojojo v w wv ojojojojojoJo y oOJO OJO OJOJOJOJOJO OJOJOJOJO O v v v v v ojojojofjojojojojojojojojofjojofojojojojojojojojojojofjojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojoj
338. una ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj gt jojoj lt jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojejojijijojojojo S0Y 10109 ony Oo o ojojo o ojojojo o o jojo jo o ojojojo ojojo a Oo d d ojo jo ojojojo jojojojojo ojo b o i 1 o jo o 8 o Gutpeey jenuew o o o o o o o ojo o ojo ojo jojojojo jojojo jo ojo o o ojo o jojo jo jojo jojojo jojo jo ojo o i Jofjojojo E os Jiopooy jueunoog onewioiny esayo o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o e e e o o o e e o o o o o o o o o o o o o o fo i fololofo seidoo jo on ojojojojojojojojojojojojojol ojojojojojo jojojojoj jofjojofjojojojojojojojojojofjo JO Jofjojojo 3 SIEIE E S 5 z El ele 3 815 5 _ El jo 2 elses le isis leis ES le le BIE ISIE LE 8 IE SIS l 18 Isls Ele 2 8 le leis lei lel le SIS e85 5 lS lS s s l le 2 8 96 IE 1S S o S18 SEE le lg 3 e le Sle SEE 8 a 5 8 3 518 15 18 5 8 8 3 18 3 3 S 3 12 5 IE 3 S IS 18 2 S S S 18 5 15 5 8 S 8 8 S 8 5 8 S si poyoejes Gu ies S 8 5 3 8 3 3 8 5 8 8 8 6 3 8 3 8 8 5 8 3 e 2 R 8 IR R E IR R 8 6 8 8 3 8 8 3 3 8 8 5 3 S 3 3 8 5 8 YJe deyo xipuaddy C350 14 28 14 3 Function Combination Table vi Jejdeyo xipuaddy
339. unctions 1 0 7 Touch 1st Tray Expert User Mode Test Print for Gradation Adyust Wed be 8 Press the Start key Bajusted DU ina the av KEJ N The test pattern is these Margin printed on 11 x 17 size m 1 paper 3 0 3 0Omm MN Letter Normal 9 Check that the left margin of the test pattern is between 2 5 mm and 3 5 mm If the left margin is within the specified range skip to step 14 bI b 3 0 mm 0 5 mm 10 If the left margin is less than 2 5 mm touch to specify the desired positive adjustment between 0 1 mm and 3 0 mm 11 If the left margin is more than 3 5 mm touch M to specify the desired negative adjustment between 0 1 mm and 3 m 12 Press the Start key The adjusted test pattern is printed on 11 x 17 size paper 13 Check the print result Make sure that the left margin is adjusted to between 2 5 mm and 3 5 mm O lfmore adjustment is necessary return to step 10 and repeat the adjustment procedure 14 Touch Enter 15 Touch Exit in the next three screens that appear The Basic screen appears again C350 10 83 o m _ 5 2 O lt Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 1 0 10 10 Specifying Expert User Mode Functions Setting the PRT Area Dup Left Margin Function This function is used to adjust the printing position at t
340. une utilisation prolong e de l appareil est effectu e Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnment r unissant des conditions de confort sant et de s curit il est pr f rable de bien a rer la pi ce ou se trouve l appareil 1 6 C350 1 2 Installation Precautions 1 1 2 Installation Precautions Installation Site To ensure utmost safety and prevent possible malfunctions install the machine in a location that meets the following requirements A location away from curtains etc that may catch fire and burn easily A location that is not exposed to water or other liquids A location free from direct sunlight A location out of the direct airflow of an air conditioner or heater and not exposed to extremely high or low temperatures A well ventilated location A location that is not exposed to high humidity A location that is not extremely dusty A location not subjected to undue vibrations A stable and level location A location where ammonia or other organic gases are not generated A location that does not put the operator in the direct airflow of exhaust from the machine A location that is not near any kind of heating devices Power Source The power source requirements are as follows e Voltage fluctuation Maximum 10 at 120 127 V AC e Frequency fluctuation Maximum 3 Hz at 60 Hz O Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations as possible C350 1 7 Chapter 1 Insta
341. unit 1 Load 11 x 17 L size paper into the 1st drawer O Letter C A3 L or A4 C can be loaded instead Press the Utility key Touch Admin Mode Using the keypad type in the administrator code o Touch Enter Touch Gradation Adjustment The Gradation Adjustment screen appears Press the Start key O Admin Mode i i Set Usable Paper in tray and press START A test pattern IS printed Test Pattern Por gradation Adjustment will be printed Gradation Adjustment Print Test Usable Paper Pattern A3 Di1x17D0 A4 D Lette D p A Mari cro JE C350 10 67 Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations Chapter 10 Utility Mode Operations 10 10 9 Setting the Gradation Adjustment Function 7 After the test pattern is printed a screen appears indicating how the test pattern must be loaded 8 Place the printed test pattern on the original glass O Align the edges of the printed test pattern with the document scales Admin Mode Place the Test Print as shown and close the Original Cover securely then press START Print Test Co Test Pattern Battern 9 Place into the 1st drawer 10 more sheets of blank paper of the same size as the printed test pattern page 10 Close the original cover or the reverse automatic document feeder
342. uplex unit AD 501 ooo eee as 11 25 13 3 Automatic paper source selection adas 4 7 15 2 C350 15 1 Index 15 Automatic scaling acia iaa Me Ls oe a 3 13 Auto select paper for small originals eeens 10 23 Average DrightMEesSS ici cierra oie eiii 3 6 Background Color uscar a a sai a 7 40 Basic SCT66N signs adas a aa 2 21 BING zzestientdttg ati da a aa fa sd 3 36 Binding mar ini ra gesgsakli ates dotas a T 3 41 Black di ta du date de 3 5 Black image density correct iaass esere 10 77 Bl vi he Ae id pus AA 7 33 BOOK tot ar 3 27 Booklet eii citcri di ala 3 35 3 38 Booklet bound cocoa ti n a eee 3 36 Boo let copy z00M rriari an ent eens een 10 17 Booklet Original a 7 23 BOOKS O 2 44 Box function EXPANSION dar s 10 47 Brightness ji tami atstat ds a 7 26 BYPASS 2 nich Sangin Be ee bt akt a 3 18 Bypass tray ici aiza aa dara kus IA saaka kasta 2 35 3 21 3 25 11 23 Genter et edit eal adas Ak 3 37 Center staple position iddsdaa aaa 10 86 Centering acia a t aa S 10 26 GHECKINA tum italia 6 16 Cleaning euclidiana 9 2 11 59 Clear access lootke tacita atan latin 10 42 Clearing a jammed staples in finisher FS 501 0 ee 11 50 Clearing a jammed staples in finisher FS 601 0 0 ee 11 53 Clearing a paper misfeed in a paper drawer cccsseeeeteeeeeeees 11 26 Clearing a paper misfeed in finisher FS 501 oo aaa 11 41 Clearing a paper misfeed in finis
343. v v v o o o o o o o o oj o o o o o v v o o v v v v ojojojojojojojojojojojafjojo w vjojo w w v v v ojojojojojojojojojojo ajo o v v ojo viv v viviv ojojojojojojojojojojoja w v vivjaja w o o o ojo o ojojo o jo aj jojo v v ojo v v v v v v o o o o o o o o o o o o o ojo o o o o o o o o o v v v ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo o o o o o o o o o o o o o oj jo o o o o o o o o o v v v oj o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o v v v ojo v o o o o o o o o o o o o o o ojo o o o o o o o jo v v v ojo ojo ojojojojojojojojojojojajojojajajojojojajajajajajajajajojojajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj jojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojoJoJo v vy ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojaja ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojajajojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojo ojojojojo ojojo a jo ojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojojojajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojojojajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojo ajajajojojojajajajajajajajajojajajaja ojojojojojojojojojojojojojajajajojojojajajajajajaja
344. y N Condition The Bypass Reserve function can be set only if Auto Paper Select is specified on the screen that appears when Paper Size is touched 1 Load the document to be copied and then press the Start key Basic Copy Operations After scanning of the document begins the message Matching paper size is not available Reselect paper size appears and scanning stops N Reference For details on positioning the document refer to Feeding the Document on page 2 41 2 Touch Bypass Hatching paper size is not available Reselect Reserve paper size The Bypass Reservation screen appears 1ix D C350 3 25 Chapter 3 Basic Copy Operations 3 3 6 Selecting a Paper Size Setting 3 Select the desired paper size S Hint Screens containing other paper sizes can be displayed by touching Custom Size or Other Sizes 4 Touch Paper Type 5 Select the desired paper type 6 Touch Enter The message Job has been stopped To resume job press the Start Key appears 7 Press the Start key Scanning of the document continues 8 Load paper of the specified size and type into the bypass tray The copies are printed N Hint If scanning of the document is finished before paper is loaded into the bypass tray the status Print Error appears in the job display However after the paper is loaded into the bypass tray the status changes to
345. zes Mixed Original Function To copy documents of mixed sizes 1 Stack the pages of the document face up as shown making sure that all pages are aligned at the top edge and on the left side 11x14 Letter 11x17 2 Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the largest page 3 Load the document so that all pages are aligned along the document guide toward the rear of the machine O Adjust the document guides to fit the size of the document S Hint Be sure to load the document correctly otherwise the pages may not be fed in straight 6 4 C350 6 2 Copying Documents of Mixed Sizes Mixed Original Function 6 4 Inthe Basic screen touch Mixed Original o To copy with the paper automatically selected select the x1 0 Zoom setting and the Auto Paper Select Paper setting o To copy with the zoom ratio automatically selected select the Auto Zoom setting and specify the desired paper size Ready to copy 5 Specify any other necessary copy settings and then press the Start key Ke _ 7 o lt Additional Copy Operations C350 6 5 Chapter 6 Additional Copy Operations 6 6 3 Printing Sa

Minolta C350 Color Printer/Scanner/Copier

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents